2007 acura mdx online reference owner's manual...

2007 Acura MDX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................iii

Your Vehicle at a Glance .....................................................................................................................3 Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 61 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 167 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 315What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 329 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 373 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 417 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 443 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 459A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 463 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Accord Value Package Audio System

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe MDX. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33STXC00

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

０６／０８／０２　０９：５９：４１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０００１　

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2007 Acura MDX was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

０６／０８／０２　０９：５９：４７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０００２　

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devicesrecord front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbagsystem component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legallyrequired or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked tothe vehicle owner.

Introduction

WARNING:

ii

０６／０８／０２　０９：５９：５１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０００３　

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention ActThe airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle contain perchlorate materials - special handlingmay apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

－

－

－－

－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

on the vehicle.Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Labels

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

０６／０８／０２　１０：００：０２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０００４　

Your MDX has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher groundclearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of

control or an accident.369

330Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iv

０６／０８／０２　１０：００：０７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０００５　

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED: If equipped

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

GAUGES

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS

HomeLink BUTTONS

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

HEADPHONE CONNECTORSAUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE BUTTON

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

MIRROR CONTROLAUTO BUTTON

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

REAR CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM

MOONROOF SWITCH

POWER TAILGATEBUTTON

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

PARKING BRAKERELEASE HANDLE

(P.272)(P.63)(P.72)

(P.130)

(P.151)

(P.147)

(P.317)

(P.132)

(P.319) (P.151) (P.263) (P.264)

(P.173)

(P.333)

(P.178)

(P.168)

(P.153)(P.150)

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG(P.9, 27)

(P.155)

(P.9, 34)

０６／０８／０２　１２：４１：５２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０００８　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.1:: If equipped

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4


VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST SYSTEMOFF SWITCH

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

HEADLIGHT WASHERSWITCH



ACTIVE DAMPERSYSTEM SWITCH

MIRROR CONTROLS


PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

STEERING WHEELAUDIO CONTROLS

HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/FRONT FOG LIGHTS


STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS

HORN

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

SEAT HEATERSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE


(P.117)

(P.352)

(P.153)

(P.155)

(P.130)

(P.151)

(P.147)

(P.317) (P.132) (P.319) (P.124) (P.266)

(P.353)

(P.146)

(P.164)

(P.122)

(P.122)

(P.34)

(P.123)(P.116)(P.229)(P.118)

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKETS

1

０６／０８／０２　１０：００：５０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０００９　

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains how yourairbags work, and it tells you how toproperly restrain infants andchildren in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 12............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 13

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 145. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 156. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 17.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 20

..Seat Belt System Components . 20......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 22

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 23Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 24......Airbag System Components . 24

......... 27........................Advanced Airbag . 29

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 32..How the SRS Indicator Works . 33

How The Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 33

How the Passenger Airbag...............Off Indicator Works . 34

.............................Airbag Service . 35...Additional Safety Precautions . 35

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 37

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 37

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 38

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 38

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 40

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 40

...Additional Safety Precautions . 41Protecting infants and

.........................Small Children . 42.......................Protecting Infants . 42

.........Protecting Small Children . 43.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45....................Installing a Child Seat . 46

...............................With LATCH . 47.With a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt . 50

..............................With a Tether . 51...........Protecting Larger Children . 54

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 54..................Using a Booster Seat . 55

..When Can a Child Sit in Front . 56...Additional Safety Precautions . 57

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 58...................................Safety Labels . 59

How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

０６／０８／０２　１０：００：５４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００１０　

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

15

409

37 57

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Control Your Speed

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Important Safety Precautions

6

０６／０８／０２　１０：０１：０３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００１１　

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones; a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(7)

(9)(3)

(1)

(2)(6)(10)

(8)

(5)

(2)

(11)

(4)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(11) Door Locks

０６／０８／０２　１０：０１：１０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００１２　

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.


Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What you should do:

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

０６／０８／０２　１０：０１：２１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００１３　

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact or rollover (seepage for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

27

30

32


Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

０６／０８／０２　１０：０１：２８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００１４　

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.


Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

What you should do:

10

０６／０８／０２　１０：０１：３４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００１５　

－

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adultpassengers, and teenage childrenwho are large enough and matureenough to drive or ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors and thetailgate are closed and locked.

When the tailgate is not tightlyclosed, the ‘‘TAILGATE OPEN’’message will come on.

When one or more doors are nottightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’message will come on.

Your vehicle has a door and tailgatemonitor on the multi-informationdisplay to indicate when a specificdoor or the tailgate is not tightlyclosed. You will see the appropriateindicator and the message for eachcondition.

37 41

CONTINUED

Introduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

０６／０８／０２　１０：０１：４２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００１６　

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

Your vehicle has the auto doorlocking/unlocking feature. For moreinformation, see page .

When both tailgate and one or moredoors are not tightly closed, the‘‘DOOR & TAILGATE OPEN’’message will come on.

130

Adjust the Front Seats2.


12

０６／０８／０２　１０：０１：５０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００１７　

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

124

140

CONTINUED

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０６／０８／０２　１０：０１：５８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００１８　

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint. See page for how to adjust the

head restraints.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.140

141

Adjust the Head Restraints4.


14

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

０６／０８／０２　１０：０２：０６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００１９　

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

The second row center seat, andboth third row seats, have adetachable shoulder belt that can beunlatched and retracted, to allow theseats to be folded down. See page

for how to unlatch and relatchthe seat belts.

If necessary, pull up on the shoulderbelt again to remove any slack, thencheck that the belt rests across thecenter of your chest and over yourshoulder.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

144

CONTINUED

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０６／０８／０２　１０：０２：１４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００２０　

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, squeeze the releasebutton and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

20

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.


16

RELEASEBUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：０２：２０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００２１　

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０６／０８／０２　１０：０２：２６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００２２　

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.


Advice for Pregnant Women

18

０６／０８／０２　１０：０２：３１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００２３　

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.


If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.


Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

０６／０８／０２　１０：０２：３８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００２４　

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seven seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

29 30

81

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components

20

０６／０８／０２　１０：０２：４６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００２５　

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallockable retractor that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any objects hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

Any objects, such as a folded-downback seat, that are touching therear of the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

15

50

CONTINUED


Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

０６／０８／０２　１７：２０：４０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００２６　

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy, or if a sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over (see page

).

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

If a side airbag or side curtain airbagdeploys during a side impact, thetensioner on that side of the vehiclewill also deploy.

The lap/shoulder belts in the centerseat of the second row and both ofthe third row seats are equipped witha detachable anchor that has twoparts: a small latch plate and abuckle.

The detachable seat belt shouldnormally be latched whenever theseat-backs are in an upright position.For more information about thedetachable seat belt, see page .144

32

do not deploy

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners


22

DETACHABLE ANCHOR

０６／０８／０２　１２：４２：０１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００２７　

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

Acura provides a limited warranty onseat belts. See your

booklet for details.

403

Acura WarrantyInformation


Seat Belt Maintenance

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０６／０８／０２　１０：０３：１０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００２８　

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components

24

(5)

(3)

(4)

(2)

(9)

(1)(6)

(4)

(5)

(8)

(10)

(11)

(7)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(9) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(10) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit(11) SRS Indicator

０６／０８／０２　１０：０３：１５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００２９　

Your Airbag System (SRS) includes:

Two SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the roofabove the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

27

30

32

CONTINUED


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

(12)

(13)(16)

(15)(14)

(17)

(12) Front Impact Sensors(13) Side Curtain Airbags(14) Side Impact Sensors (First)(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)(16) Roll Rate Sensor(17) Safing Sensor

０６／０８／０２　１０：０３：２２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００３０　

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

A rollover sensor that can detect ifyour vehicle is about to roll overand signal the control unit todeploy both side curtain airbagsand front seat belt tensioners (seepage ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact,side impact, or if your vehicle isabout to rollover.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and a frontpassenger’s seat belt is latched orunlatched (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

22

20

29

29

33

3132

33

34


26

０６／０８／０２　１０：０３：３２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００３１　

After inflating, the front airbags willimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).29

CONTINUED

How Your Front Airbags Work


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

０６／０８／０２　１０：０３：３９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００３２　

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

Dual-Threshold Airbags

latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

not latched


28

０６／０８／０２　１０：０３：４８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００３３　

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

Second-row passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Acura doesnot encourage carrying an infant orsmall child in front, if the sensorsdetect the weight of an infant orsmall child (up to about 65 lbs or 29kg), the system will automaticallyturn the passenger’s front airbag off.

CONTINUED

Advanced Airbags


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

０６／０８／０２　１０：０３：５７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００３４　

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag and activate the seat belttensioner.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A second-row passenger pushingor pulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Moving the front passenger’s seator seat-back forcibly back againstthe folded right-side second-rowseat.

Also, make sure the floor matbehind the front passenger’s seatis hooked to the floor mat anchor(see page ). If it is not, the matmay interfere with the properoperation of the sensors andoperation of the seat.

34

404

How Your Side Airbags Work


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

30

０６／０８／０２　１０：０４：０６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００３５　

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Although Acura does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if thesensors in the seat detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

33Side Airbag Cutoff System


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

０６／０８／０２　１０：０４：１４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００３６　

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the rollover sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over, it signalsthe control unit, which immediatelydeploys both side curtain airbags andactivates both front seat belttensioners.

The airbag on the passenger’s sidewill deploy, and the seat belttensioner will activate, even if thereare no passengers on that side of thevehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

In a Side Impact

In a Rollover


32

０６／０８／０２　１０：０４：２１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００３７　

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

This indicatoralerts you that the

passenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKAIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and go out(see page ). If it does not come on,stays on, or comes on while drivingwithout a passenger in the front seat,you will also see a ‘‘PASSENGERSIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on themulti-information display. Have thesystem checked (see page ).81

81

66

How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the SRS Indicator Works

not


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

０６／０８／０２　１０：０４：３２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００３８　

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any objects hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

Any object, such as a folded-downback seat, that is touching the rearof the seat-back.

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not mean


34

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATORU.S. Canada

０６／０８／０２　１０：０４：４２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００３９　

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts worn during the crash tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

CONTINUED

Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

０６／０８／０２　１０：０４：５１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００４０　

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact AcuraClient Services at 800-382-2238.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.


Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

36

０６／０８／０２　１０：０４：５５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００４１　

－

－－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

42 5354 57

properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

０６／０８／０２　１０：０５：０２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００４２　

－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.

Children who ride in the back areless likely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

34

54

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat


Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.Infants

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

38

０６／０８／０２　１０：０５：１３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００４３　

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

SUN VISORS

０６／０８／０２　１０：０５：２６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００４４　

－

Your vehicle has two rows of backseats where children can be properlyrestrained. If you ever have to carrya group of children, and a child mustride in front:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in a backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

54

12

17

15

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention


40

０６／０８／０２　１０：０５：３４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００４５　

－

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

This can prevent childrenfrom accidentally falling out (seepage ).

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the tailgate,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.


Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.131

50 51


Additional Safety PrecautionsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Lock all doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

０６／０８／０２　１０：０５：４２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００４６　

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

When properly installed in thesecond row, a rear-facing child seatmay prevent the driver or a frontpassenger from moving their seat asfar back as recommended, or fromlocking their seat-back in the desiredposition.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

It can also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

42

０６／０８／０２　１０：０５：５１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００４７　

CONTINUED

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.


Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０６／０８／０２　１０：０５：５９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００４８　

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Even with advanced front airbags,which can automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

34


Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

44

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０６／０８／０２　１０：０６：０５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００４９　

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the second-rowseats.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

０６／０８／０２　１０：０６：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００５０　

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for a rear-facing child seat.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

46

０６／０８／０２　１０：０６：１８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００５１　

CONTINUED

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at each of the secondrow seats.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat in either outer second row seat:

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

When you install a child seat in rearseating position, use the loweranchors as shown in the illustration.You can install up to three childseats at a time with LATCH.

Do not attach two child seatconnectors to a single lower anchorat a time.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

1.

2.

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH


Using the Outer LATCH

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

LOWER ANCHORS

MARKS

０６／０８／０２　１０：０６：２８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００５２　

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connector as shownabove.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

3.

4.

5.141


48

RIGID TYPE FLEXIBLE TYPE TETHER STRAP

０６／０８／０２　１０：０６：３５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００５３　

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat in the center seating position onthe second row seat, use the centerlower anchors as shown above.

Follow step 1 through 4 asdescribed previously to secure thechild seat.

Lower the head restraint first.Route the tether strap over thehead restraint and seat-back, thenattach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Pull up the cover below thearmrest and find one of theanchors. The other anchor islocated underneath the flap at thebottom of the outer seat’s innerbolster.

6.

7.

2.

3.

4.

1.

Using the Center LATCH


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

０６／０８／０２　１０：０６：４４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００５４　

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

If you intend to install a child seat inthe center seating position of secondrow seat, make sure the detachableseat belt is securely latched (seepage ).

1. 2.

3.

144

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


50

０６／０８／０２　１７：３７：１３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００５５　

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe second or third row.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

4. 5.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

０６／０８／０２　１０：０７：００　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００５６　

Each second row seat has a tetheranchorage point behind the seat-back.

After properly securing the childseat in the desired position (seepage ), lift the head restraint,then route the tether strap overthe seat-back.

For the center seat, lower the headrestraint, then route the tether strapover the head restraint and seat-back.

1.

50

Second Row Installation


52

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

TETHER STRAP

Outer Seating Position

０６／０８／０２　１０：０７：０７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００５７　

Route the tether strap over thehead restraint, then attach thetether strap hook to the anchor,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Each third row seat has a tetheranchorage point on the tailgate sill.

Secure the child seat in thedesired position (see page ).

Select the anchor point you wantto use. Then open the anchorcover with a small flat-tipscrewdriver.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the tetherstrap is not twisted.

2.

1.

3.2.

3.

50


Third Row Installation

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

53

０６／０８／０２　１０：０７：１６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００５８　

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

1.

2.

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit

54

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０６／０８／０２　１０：０７：２３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００５９　

CONTINUED

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intendto drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards and that youfollow the booster seat maker’sinstructions.

3.

4.

5.


Using a Booster Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

55

０６／０８／０２　１０：０７：３１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００６０　

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

15 54


When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity

56

０６／０８／０２　１０：０７：４０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００６１　

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.


Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

57

０６／０８／０２　１０：０７：４８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００６２　

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

With the tailgate open, airflow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windows,and set the climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

58

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０６／０８／０２　１０：０７：５５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００６３　

CONTINUED

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

59

RADIATOR CAP

HOOD

DASHBOARD

BATTERY LABEL

０６／０８／０２　１０：０８：０５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００６４　

U.S. models

Canadian models

Canadian modelsU.S. models

U.S. models

Safety Labels

60

SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

０６／０８／０２　１０：０８：２１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００６５　

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 62............................Instrument Panel . 63

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 64.............................................Gauges . 72

.............Multi-Information Display . 73Controls Near the Steering

.........................................Wheel . 115Windshield Wipers and

.................................Washers . 116Rear Window Wiper and

...................................Washer . 117.........Turn Signal and Headlights . 118

...............Hazard Warning Button . 122

...............Rear Window Defogger . 122......Instrument Panel Brightness . 123......Steering Wheel Adjustments . 124

.............................Keys and Locks . 126......................Immobilizer System . 128

..............................Ignition Switch . 129....................................Door Locks . 130

............Childproof Door Locks . 131..........................................Tailgate . 131

..........................Power Tailgate . 132.....................Remote Transmitter . 135

...............................................Seats . 140...................Detachable Anchor . 144

..................................Seat Heaters . 146............................Power Windows . 147

.......................................Moonroof . 150...............................Parking Brake . 151

...........................................Mirrors . 152Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 155...............................Interior Lights . 157

.........Interior Convenience Items . 160.....................Beverage Holders . 161

.............Console Compartment . 162..............Storage Compartment . 162

..................................Glove Box . 162....................Sunglasses Holder . 163

.............................Cargo Hooks . 163...................................Sun Visor . 164

............................Vanity Mirror . 164........Accessory Power Sockets . 164

.......................AC Power Outlet . 165

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

０６／０８／０２　１０：０８：２５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００６６　

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

: If equipped

Control Locations

62

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

GAUGES

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS

HomeLink BUTTONS

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

HEADPHONE CONNECTORSAUXILIARY INPUT JACKS




CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

MIRROR CONTROLAUTO BUTTON

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

REAR CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM

MOONROOF SWITCH




(P.155)

(P.130)

(P.151)

(P.147)

(P.317)

(P.132)

(P.319) (P.151) (P.263) (P.264)

(P.173)

(P.333)

(P.178)

(P.168)

(P.153)

(P.150)(P.272)(P.63)(P.72)

０６／０８／０２　１０：０８：３３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００６７　

＊＊

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.:: If equipped

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP

A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.65)

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

SH-AWD INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEMINDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

(P.68)

(P.70)

(P.71)

(P.66)

(P.69)

(P.69)

(P.65)

(P.68)

(P.65)(P.70) (P.67)

(P.67)

(P.71)

(P.70)(P.70)

LOW FUELINDICATOR (P.71)

(P.68)

(P.66)

(P.66)

(P.70)

(P.64)

(P.73)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.431)

０６／０８／０２　１０：０８：４３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００６８　

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals, and youwill also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

For more information, see page .

This indicator reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belts, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belts before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

81

20

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

64

０６／０８／０２　１０：０８：４９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００６９　

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. Driving withthe parking brake not fullyreleased can damage the rearbrakes, axles, and tires.

If you drive without releasing theparking brake, a beeper will sound,and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, it canindicate a problem in the brakesystem. You will also see a ‘‘LOWBRAKE FLUID’’ or ‘‘CHECKBRAKE SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepages ). For more information,see page .

If this indicator comes on whenthe engine is running, the batteryis not being charged, and you willalso see a ‘‘CHECK CHARGINGSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. For moreinformation, see page .

The engine can be severelydamaged if this indicator flashesor stays on when the engine isrunning, or if a ‘‘CHECK ENGINEOIL LEVEL’’ message is on themulti-information display. Formore information, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display. Formore information, see page .

1.

2.

430

430

431

81

81432


Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

U.S. Canada

０６／０８／０２　１０：０８：５９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００７０　

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. You will alsosee a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAGOFF’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourside airbags, passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system, side curtainairbags, or automatic seat belttensioners. You will also see a‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator normally comes onfor a few seconds when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. If this indicator comes onat any other time, there is aproblem in the ABS. If thishappens, take the vehicle to yourdealer to have it checked. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. You will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

8133

8133

81349

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag Off Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator


66

U.S. Canada

０６／０８／０２　１０：０９：０６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００７１　

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).Take your vehicle to a dealer to haveit checked. Without VSA, yourvehicle still has normal driving ability,but will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator may also come on ifthere is a problem with the trailerstability assist function (see page

).

This indicator has four functions.

It flashes when trailer stabilityassist is activating (see page ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message and a‘‘CHECK TRAILER STABILITYASSIST’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)

position. For more information, seepage .

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicator does notblink or blinks rapidly, it usuallymeans one of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page ). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signals blink. Allturn signals on the outside of thevehicle should flash.

1.

2.

3.

4.81

351

367

351

81

351

398367


Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators Instrum

entsand

Controls

67

０６／０８／０２　１０：０９：１８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００７２　

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid. It should come onfor a few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it means the transmission fluidtemperature is too high. Pull to theside of the road when it is safe, shiftto Park, and let the engine idle untilthe indicator goes out.

You will also see an ‘‘A/T TEMPHIGH’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

Most of the time, this indicatorcomes on along with other indicatorsin the instrument panel such as theseat belt reminder indicator, SRSindicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are extremely low onpressure.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost pressure on the multi-information display, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,have the flat tire repaired as soon aspossible. If two or more tires areunderinflated, call a professionaltowing service. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when thereis a system message on the multi-information display. Press the INFObutton on the steering wheel (seepage ) to see the message (seepage ).

82

433

8173

82

A/T TemperatureIndicator

Message IndicatorLow Tire PressureIndicator


68

Continuing to drive with the A/Ttemperature indicator on may causeserious damage to the transmission.

０６／０８／０２　１０：０９：２９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００７３　

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If this indicator comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe SH-AWD system. You will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ). Take yourvehicle to a dealer to have it checked.For more information, see page .

Pull to the side of the road when it issafe, shift to Park, and let the engineidle until the indicator goes out.

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine’s fuel system will bedisabled. (see page ).

If the indicator blinks while driving,it indicates the differentialtemperature is too high.You will also see a ‘‘SH-AWD DIFFTEMP. HIGH’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

82

82

128

340

SH-AWD Indicator Immobilizer SystemIndicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

Continuing to drive with the SH-AWDindicator blinking may cause seriousdamage to the system.

０６／０８／０２　１０：０９：３７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００７４　

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. This indicatorwill also come on when the lightswitch is in AUTO and the lightsturn on automatically. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

266

266118

120

Lights On Indicator Cruise Main IndicatorFog Light Indicator

High Beam IndicatorCruise Control Indicator


70

０６／０８／０２　１０：０９：４７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００７５　

This indicator normally comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II), and remains on until theengine starts. If this indicator comeson at any other time, there is aproblem in the system. While thisindicator is on, the comfort buttonwill not work, and the system willnot function. You will also see a "CHECK ADS SYSTEM" message onthe multi-information display. Have the vehicle checked by your dealer assoon as possible. For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

When the indicator comes on, thereis about 1.8 US gal (7.0 ) of fuelremaining in the tank before theneedle reaches E. There is a smallreserve of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the needle does reach E. You

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.

353265

Active Damper SystemIndicator

Low Fuel Indicator Security System Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

LOW FUEL INDICATOR SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０６／０８／０２　１０：０９：５５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００７６　

will also see a "LOW FUEL" messageon the multi-information display (seepage 82).

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, the pointermay rise to the upper zone. If itreaches the red (hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. For

instructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem, see page .

This shows how much fuel youhave. It may show slightly moreor less than the actual amount.

428

Gauges

Temperature Gauge

Fuel Gauge

72

U.S. model is shown.

SPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGETEMPERATUREGAUGE

TACHOMETER

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

０６／０８／０２　１０：１０：０３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００７７　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼The multi-information display in theinstrument panel displays variousinformation and messages when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. Some of the messages helpyou operate your vehicle morecomfortably.Others help to keep you aware of theperiodic maintenance your vehicleneeds for continued trouble-freedriving.

When you open the driver’s door, a‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on themulti-information display. When youturn the ignition switch from the ON(II) position to the ACCESSORY (I)position, a ‘‘Goodbye’’ message isshown on the display.

To change the display, press theINFO ( / ) button on the steeringwheel repeatedly until the mainmenu appears (see page ).

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the multi-informationdisplay changes as shown in the nextpage each time you press the INFO( / ) button or SEL/RESETbutton.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, what you lastselected is displayed.

In the multi-information display, thesystem message is also displayed(see page ) and you cancustomize your vehicle controlsettings (see page ).

74

80

83

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

INFO ( / )BUTTON

SEL/RESETBUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：１０：１０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００７８　


74

Main Menu

INFO button

SEL/RESET button

(See page 75)

Go to Customize Menu (See page 83)

Go to HandsFreeLink Menu (See page 276)

Trip Computer (See page 78)

(See page 75)

(See page 75)

Tire Pressure for each tire (See page 77)

０６／０８／０２　１０：１０：１５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００７９　

When the main menu is blank,SH-AWD or TIRE PRESSURE,pressing the SEL/RESET buttonchanges the display to ‘‘trip meter/odometer’’ ‘‘outside temperature/odometer’’ and ‘‘engine oil life/odometer’’.

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it. Thereare two trip meters: Trip A and TripB. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0.’’ CONTINUED


Trip MeterOdometer

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

ODOMETER

TRIP METER

０６／０８／０２　１２：４２：０９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００８０　

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your vehicle speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.You can adjust the outsidetemperature display (see page ).

This shows the outside Fahrenheittemperature in U.S. models, andCentigrade temperature in Canadianmodels.

When you reset Trip A, average fueleconomy A is reset at the same time.When you reset Trip B, average fueleconomy B is reset.

In the customizing mode, you can setTrip A and average fuel economy Ato reset at the same time when yourefuel your vehicle (see page ).92

91

Outside Temperature


76

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

U.S.

CANADA

０６／０８／０２　１０：１０：３１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００８１　

When the tire pressure monitor isshown on the multi-informationdisplay, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes asshown.You can see the pressure of each tirein this monitor. If one or more tiresare low, inflate them to the correctpressure. For more information, seepage .

This monitor shows how muchtorque is being delivered to eachwheel. For more information, seepage .

This shows the remaining life of theengine oil. It shows 100% after theengine oil is replaced and the displayis reset. The engine oil life iscalculated based on engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions. For more information,see page .375

340

343

Tire Pressure MonitorSH-AWD Torque DistributionMonitor

Engine Oil Life


Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

U.S.

Canada

ENGINE OIL LIFE

０６／０８／０２　１０：１０：３９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００８２　

You can receive or make phone callsfrom your cellphone through yourvehicle’s HandsFreeLink (HFL)system without touching yourcellphone.

To use the system, your cellphoneand the HFL system must be linked.Not all cellphones are compatiblewith this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to linkyour cellphone to the HFL and howto receive or make phone calls, orvisit the handsfreelink.com website.

When the main menu displays TripComputer, pressing the SEL/RESETbutton changes the display to‘‘AVERAGE FUEL A/RANGE’’ to‘‘AVERAGE FUEL B/RANGE’’ andto ‘‘AVERAGE SPEED/ELAPSEDTIME’’.

276

HandsFreeLink Trip Computer


78

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：１０：４５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００８３　

This shows the estimated distanceyou can travel on the fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This distance isestimated from the fuel economyyou received over the last severalmiles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),so it will vary with changes in speed,traffic, etc.

This shows your vehicle’s averagefuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)or liter/100 km (Canadian models)since you last reset the Trip A orTrip B.

You can customize the Trip A andAVERAGE FUEL A reset conditionin the multi-information display (seepage ).

This shows the average speed youare traveling in miles per hour (mph)for U.S. models or kilometers perhour (km/h) for Canadian models.

To reset the AVERAGE SPEED youhave traveled, press and hold theSEL/RESET button until thenumber resets.

This shows the time passed traveledsince you last reset it. When you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, ELAPSED TIME is reset.

If you want to reset the ELAPSEDTIME manually, go to the tripcomputer’s ELAPSED TIME display,and press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets.

You can customize the ELAPSEDTIME reset condition in the multi-information display (see page ).94

92

AVERAGE FUEL A/B RANGE

AVERAGE SPEED

ELAPSED TIME


Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

０６／０８／０２　１０：１０：５４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００８４　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

If there is a problem with yourvehicle, for example, the engine oillevel is low or a door is not fullyclosed, the multi-information displaywill show you the problem. It doesthis by interrupting the currentdisplay with one or more messages.

The system message(s) triggers theappropriate indicator(s) on theinstrument panel, including thesystem message indicator, to comeon. The system message indicatordoes not go off until the problem(s)is corrected.

You will also hear a beep when thesystem message indicator comes onfor the first time.

Most of the messages are displayedfor about 5 seconds, and then thenormal display returns. If there areseveral system messages to beshown, the display switches thesemessages every 5 seconds.

To cancel the message(s) before 5seconds elapsed, press the INFO( / ) button on the steering wheel.

Even if you press the INFO ( / )button, some messages stay on orcome on again at regular intervalsuntil the problem is corrected.

You can see the message(s) again bypressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly if the system messageindicator remains lit on theinstrument panel.

Here is a list of all messages:


System Messages

80

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

０６／０８／０２　１０：１１：０２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００８５　

CONTINUED

See page33

See page11

See page20

See page20

See page33

See page151

See page432

See page432

See page430

See page431

See page430

See page349

See page351

See page368


Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

０６／０８／０２　１０：１１：１７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００８６　

See page341

See page332

See page121

See page376

See page318

See page71

See page392

See page354

See page333

See page341

See page134

See page68

See page345

See page346

See page346


82

U.S.

Canada

０６／０８／０２　１０：１１：３０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００８７　

When the main menu displays‘‘Keyless Memory Settings ,’’ youcan customize some vehicle controlsettings.To enter the customizing mode,press the SEL/RESET button.

If you turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position, or move the shift lever outof Park, the display will change tothe normal screen.

You can customize some vehiclecontrol settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately. If ‘‘DRIVER1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ is not displayed,customizing is not possible.

To have the driver’s ID detected,make sure your remote transmitteris linked to the system (see KeylessMemory Settings on page ).

If you want the settings as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory,select DEFAULT ALL, as describedon page .

Refer to the table on the followingpages about the settings you want tocustomize.

If you want to change any vehiclecontrol settings, select CHGSETTING, then press the SEL/RESET button.

To change the settings, the ignitionswitch must be in the ON (II)position, and the vehicle must bestopped with the transmission inPark.

86

139TM

CONTINUED


Customize Settings

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

TM

０６／１１／０８　０９：５８：２４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００８８　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－～± ～

－～± ～

＊

TRIP B

LOWMINOFF

ENGLISHFRENCHSPANISH

5°F 0°F 5°F(U.S.)

3°C 0°C 3°C(Canada)ONOFFHIGHMIDLOWMANUAL ONLYIGN OFFTRIP AMAXHIGHMIDONOFFONOFF

Changes the language used in the display.

Changes the outside temperature reading above orbelow its current reading.

Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economyto reset when you refuel.Changes the indicator alarm volumes into threelevels.

Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.

Changes the interior light sensitivity to your liking.

Changes the driver’s seat, the steering wheel, andthe outside mirror positions to a stored setting.Moves the steering wheel fully in and up whenthe key is removed.

METER SETUP(P.89)

POSITION SETUP(P.97)

90

91

92

93

94

95

98

99

LANGUAGE SELECTION

ADJUST OUTSIDETEMP. DISPLAY

TRIP A & AVG. FUELRESET with REFUELADJUSTALARM VOLUME

ELAPSED TIME RESET

AUTO INTERIORILLUMINATION

MEMORY POSITION LINK

AUTO TILT & TELESCOPESTEERING WHEEL

: Default setting

Setting OptionDescriptionGroup Setup PageMenu Item


84

０６／０８／０２　１０：１１：４６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００８９　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Menu Item DescriptionGroup Setup PageSetting OptionINTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIMEHEADLIGHTAUTO OFF TIMER

AUTO LIGHTSENSITIVITY

AUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

KEY AND REMOTEUNLOCK MODEKEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT

SECURITY RELOCKTIMER

WIPER ACTION

Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lightsstay on after you close the doors and the tailgate.Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lightsstay on after you close the driver’s door.

Changes the timing of when the headlights comeon. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTOposition.Changes the setting of when to automatically lockthe doors.

Changes the setting of when to automaticallyunlock the driver’s/all the doors.

Changes which doors unlock with the remotetransmitter in a first push.The exterior lights flash each time you press theLOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will alsosound when you press the LOCK button twice.Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for thedoors to relock and the security system to set afteryou unlock but do not open the door.Changes the wiper operation between two settingswhen the wiper switch is in the INT position.Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.

LIGHTING SETUP(P.100)

DOOR/WINDOWSETUP(P.105)

WIPER SETUP(P.113)DEFAULT ALL(P.86)

101

102

103

106

107

109

110

111

113

86

60 sec30 sec60 sec30 sec15 secMAXHIGHMIDSHIFT FROM PWITH VEH SPDOFF

IGN OFFOFFDRIVER DOORALL DOORSONOFF

90 sec60 sec30 secINTERMITTENTWITH VEH SPDSETCANCEL

15 sec

0 sec

LOWMIN

: Default setting

SHIFT TO P DRIVER DOOR/ALL DOORS


Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

０６／０８／０２　１０：１１：５２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００９０　

▲ ▼ ▲ ▼If you want to set the default settings,press the INFO ( / ) button toselect DEFAULT ALL, then pressthe SEL/RESET button.

When DEFAULT ALL is set, you willsee the above display for severalseconds, then the screen returns toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If the setting is not successfullycompleted, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown forseveral seconds, and then the screengoes back to the normal messagemode. Repeat the same procedure toselect DEFAULT ALL.

If you want to cancel DEFAULTALL, select CANCEL, then press theSEL/RESET button. The screengoes back to the previous display.

To set the default settings, press theINFO ( / ) button to select SETthen press the SEL/RESET button.

DEFAULT ALL


86

０６／０８／０２　１０：１１：５９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００９１　

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

You can customize some of thevehicle control settings to yourpreference. Here are the settingsyou can customize:

METER SETUP

LIGHTING SETUPPOSITION SETUP

DOOR/WINDOW SETUPWIPER SETUP

Each time you press the INFO ( /) button, the screen changes as

shown on the next page. Press theINFO ( / ) button, until you seethe setup you want to customize,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

When you want to change thevehicle control settings, press theINFO ( / ) button to select CHGSETTING, then press the SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED


Customize Settings

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

０６／０８／０２　１０：１２：０８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００９２　

▲ ▼


88

Select‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’

SEL/RESET BUTTON

INFO ( / ) BUTTON

METER SETUPsee page 89

POSITION SETUPsee page 97

LIGHTING SETUPsee page 100

DOOR/WINDOW SETUPsee page 105

WIPER SETUPsee page 113

Select ‘‘EXIT’’

Select ‘‘CANCEL’’

０６／０８／０２　１０：１２：１３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００９３　

▲▼

▲ ▼ ▲ ▼

LANGUAGE SELECTIONADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAYTRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESETwith REFUEL

Here are the six custom settings forthe meter setup:

ADJUST ALARM VOLUMEELAPSED TIME RESETAUTO INTERIORILLUMINATION

While METER SETUP is shown,press the SEL/RESET button toenter the customize mode.


shown in the illustration. Press theINFO ( / ) button until you seethe setting you want to customize,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Meter Setup


Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

INFO ( / )BUTTON

SEL/RESETBUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：１２：２２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００９４　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Language Selection

There are three language selectionsyou can make: English, French, andSpanish. To choose the language youwant, follow these instructions:

You can choose this customize itemfrom ‘‘METER SETUP’’ by pressingthe INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to seethe selections.

Select the desired language bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then enter your selection by pressingthe SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display changes asshown above, and then goes back tothe customize item screen.

If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ andrepeat the procedure again.


90

０６／０８／０２　１０：１２：３０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００９５　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

If you sometimes find that thetemperature reading is a fewdegrees above or below the actualtemperature, you can adjust it byfollowing these instructions:


Adjust the outside temperature valueby pressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly. Press the SEL/RESETbutton to set the desired value.


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY’’ and repeat the procedureagain.


Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

Canadian models

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models

０６／０８／０２　１０：１２：３９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００９６　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Trip A & Avg. Fuel Reset With Refuel

To cause Trip A and AVG. FUEL toreset every time you refuel yourvehicle, follow these instructions:



Select ON or OFF by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIPA & AVG. FUEL RESET withREFUEL’’ and repeat the procedureagain.


92

０６／０８／０２　１０：１２：４６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００９７　

▲ ▼▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Adjust Alarm Volume

Select the warning alarm volumefrom three levels.



Select the desired level by pressingthe INFO ( / ) button, then enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘ADJUST ALARM VOLUME’’ andrepeat the procedure again.


Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

０６／０８／０２　１０：１２：５５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００９８　

－

－

－

－▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Elapsed Time ResetThere are four elapsed time resetchoices you can make:

MANUAL ONLY You can resetthe elapsed time, when TripComputer’s Elapsed Time isdisplayed (see page ).

IGN OFF The elapsed time isreset when you turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position.

TRIP A The elapsed time is resetwhen the Trip A is reset.

TRIP B The elapsed time is resetwhen the Trip B is reset.



Select the desired setting bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then enter your selection by pressingthe SEL/RESET button.

79


94

０６／０８／０２　１０：１３：０３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　００９９　

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Auto Interior Illumination



If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET’’ andrepeat the procedure again.

While the headlight switch is turnedon, the interior lights gradually dim,as the outside light level gets low.You can customize at which outsidelight level the lights start to dim.

There are MAX, HIGH, MID, LOWand MIN levels and OFF for the autointerior illumination settings.

If you want the illuminations to startdimming as early as possible, selectMAX. For illuminations to startdimming as late as possible, selectMIN. Choose HIGH, MID, or LOWfor levels in between.

To disable the auto interiorillumination function, select OFF.


Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

０６／０８／０２　１０：１３：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１００　

▲ ▼


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTOINTERIOR ILLUMINATION’’ andrepeat the procedure again.




96

０６／０８／０２　１０：１３：１８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１０１　

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Here are the two custom settings forthe position setup:

MEMORY POSITION LINKAUTO TILT & TELESCOPESTEERING WHEEL

While ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ is shown,press the SEL/RESET button toenter the customize mode.




Position Setup

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

SEL/RESETBUTTON

INFO ( or )BUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：１３：２６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１０２　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Memory Position Link

If ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ isset to ‘‘ON,’’ the driver’s seat, thesteering wheel, and outside mirrorpositions move to the position storedin the memory when you open thedriver’s door, using the remotetransmitter.

You can choose this customize itemfrom ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ bypressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly.




If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ andrepeat the procedure again.


98

０６／０８／０２　１０：１３：３４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１０３　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Auto Tilt & Telescope Steering Wheel

When ‘‘AUTO TILT & TELESCOPESTEERING WHEEL’’ is set to ‘‘ON,’’the steering wheel automaticallymoves fully in and up when you turnthe ignition switch to the LOCK (0)position and remove the key.

You can choose this customize itemfrom ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ bypressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly.




If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTOTILT & TELESCOPE STEERINGWHEEL’’ and repeat the procedureagain.


Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

０６／０８／０２　１０：１３：４２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１０４　

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIMEHEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMERAUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY

While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ isshown, press the SEL/RESETbutton to enter the customize mode.



Here are the three custom settingsfor the lighting setup:

Lighting Setup


100

SEL/RESETBUTTONINFO ( or )BUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：１３：５０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１０５　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Interior Light Dimming Time

The interior lights fade out when youclose all doors and tailgate. Tochange how long the lights stay onbefore they fade out, follow theseinstructions:

You can choose this customize itemfrom ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ bypressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly.



If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMINGTIME’’ and repeat the procedureagain.



Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

０６／０８／０２　１０：１３：５８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１０６　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Headlight Auto Off Timer




The headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights, and licenseplate lights go off after the selectedtime when you remove the key fromthe ignition switch and close thedriver’s door. To change how longthe lights stay on before they go off,follow these instructions:


102

０６／０８／０２　１０：１４：０５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１０７　

▲ ▼

－

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

Auto Light SensitivityThe headlights automatically comeon when the headlight switch is inthe AUTO position and the ambientlight reaches a changeable level. Youcan select the auto light sensitivityfrom the following five levels:



If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’and repeat the procedure again.

MINThe headlights come on when it isdark.

MAXThe headlights come on when it isbright.

HIGHThe headlights come on when it issomewhat bright.

MIDThe headlights come on when it is asbright as sunset or sunrise.

LOWThe headlights come on when it issomewhat dark.


Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

０６／０８／０２　１０：１４：１４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１０８　

▲ ▼


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTOLIGHT SENSITIVITY’’ and repeatthe procedure again.




104

０６／０８／０２　１０：１４：２０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１０９　

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Here are the five custom settings forthe door/window setup:

AUTO DOOR LOCKAUTO DOOR UNLOCKKEY AND REMOTE UNLOCKMODEKEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENTSECURITY RELOCK TIMER

While ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’is shown, press the SEL/RESETbutton to enter the customize mode.




Door/Window Setup

Instruments

andC

ontrols

105

SEL/RESETBUTTON

INFO ( or )BUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：１４：２９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１１０　

－

－

－

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Auto Door LockThere are three settings you canchoose from:

SHIFT FROM PThe doors lock whenever you movethe shift lever out of Park.

WITH VEH SPDThe doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches about 10 mph (about15 km/h).

OFFThe auto door lock is deactivated allthe time.

You can choose this customize itemfrom ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ bypressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly.




106

０６／０８／０２　１０：１４：３７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１１１　

－

－

－▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Auto Door UnlockThere are three settings you canchoose from:

SHIFT TO P The driver’s door orall the doors, depending on the doorlock mode setting ( see page ),unlock when you move the shiftlever to Park.

IGN OFF The driver’s door or allthe doors, depending on the doorlock mode setting ( see page ),unlock when you turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position.

OFF The auto door unlock isdeactivated all the time. This is thefactory default setting.



If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTODOOR LOCK’’ and repeat theprocedure again.

106

106


Instruments

andC

ontrols

107

０６／０８／０２　１０：１４：４６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１１２　

▲ ▼▲ ▼


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTODOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat theprocedure again.

If you choose ‘‘SHIFT TO P’’ or ‘‘IGNOFF’’, you will see the above display.

Press the INFO ( / ) button toswitch the door lock mode settingbetween the driver’s door and alldoors. Then, press the SEL/RESETbutton to enter your selection.




108

０６／０８／０２　１０：１４：５３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１１３　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Key and Remote Unlock Mode

To select whether the driver’s doorunlocks or all the doors unlock whenyou unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, follow theseinstructions.




If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘KEYAND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE’’and repeat the procedure again.


CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

109

０６／０８／０２　１０：１５：０２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１１４　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Keyless Lock AcknowledgmentWhen you push the LOCK button onthe remote transmitter, someexterior lights flash, and a beepersounds when you push the LOCKbutton again within 5 seconds toverify that the doors and the tailgateare locked and the security systemhas set (see page ). You cancustomize the exterior lights not toflash and the beeper not to sound.




265


110

０６／０８／０２　１０：１５：０９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１１５　

▲ ▼

Security Relock TimerIf you unlock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitter,but do not open any of the doors orthe tailgate within 30 seconds, thedoors and the tailgate automaticallyrelock and the security system sets.

You can change this relock timefrom 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.



If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeatthe procedure again.

CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

111

０６／０８／０２　１０：１５：１６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１１６　

▲ ▼



If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ andrepeat the procedure again.



112

０６／０８／０２　１０：１５：２２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１１７　

▲▼

▲ ▼

－

－▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Here is one custom setting for thewiper setup:



You can select from these twosettings when the wiper switch is inthe INT (intermittent) position:

INTERMITTENT Theintermittent operation variesaccording to the selection you makeon the wiper lever’s intermittentcontrol ring.

WITH VEH SPD The intermittentoperation varies according to vehiclespeed.

While ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ is shown,press the SEL/RESET button toenter the customize mode.

WIPER ACTION

Wiper Action


Wiper Setup

Instruments

andC

ontrols

113

INFO ( / )BUTTON

SEL/RESETBUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：１５：３０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１１８　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘WIPER ACTION’’ and repeat theprocedure again.



You can choose this customize itemfrom ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ by pressingthe INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.



114

０６／０８／０２　１０：１５：３８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１１９　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊ To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

: If equipped1:

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

115


VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST SYSTEMOFF SWITCH

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

HEADLIGHT WASHERSWITCH

ACTIVE DAMPERSYSTEM SWITCH

MIRROR CONTROLS


PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

STEERING WHEELAUDIO CONTROLS


CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

HORN

HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/FRONT FOG LIGHTS



STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS

SEAT HEATERSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

(P.117)

(P.352)

(P.153)

(P.147)

(P.317)

(P.132) (P.319)(P.353)

(P.266)

(P.146)

(P.164)

(P.122)

(P.122)

(P.34)

(P.123)(P.116)(P.229)(P.118)

(P.124)

(P.155)

(P.130)

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKETS

1

０６／０８／０２　１０：１５：４７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１２０　

－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull backand hold the wiper control lever.The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers runat low speed, then complete onemore sweep after you release thelever.

To change the ‘‘WIPER ACTION’’setting, see page .

The length of the wipeinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to vehicle speed.

If you turn it to the shortest delay,the wipers change to low speedoperation when the vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

1.2.3.4.5.6. 113

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

Windshield Washer

INT

Windshield Wipers and Washers

116

０６／０８／０２　１０：１５：５５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１２１　

－

When you turn the wiper switch tothe ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper willreturn to its parked position.

Rotate the switchclockwise to turn the rear windowwiper ON. The wiper operatesintermittently.

The headlight washers can beoperated at any time by pressing theheadlight washer button located nextto the steering wheel column. Theheadlights must be turned on to usethis button. In addition, the headlightwasher operates when thewindshield washers are first turnedon.

The headlight washers use the samefluid reservoir as the windshieldwashers.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Headlight Washers(On Canadian models)

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

ON

Instruments

andC

ontrols

117

０６／０８／０２　１０：１６：０３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１２２　

－

－

Hold past ON to turn the rearwindow wiper on and to spray therear window washer.

Rotate the switchcounterclockwise to spray thewindow washer.

When you shift the transmissionto the reverse position with thefront windshield wipers activated,the rear window wiper operatesautomatically.

When the wiper control leverposition is INT, the rear wiperoperates intermittently. When it isLO or HI, the rear wiper operatescontinuously.

Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, side-marker lights, andrear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights. Ifyou leave the lights on with the keyremoved from the ignition switch,you will hear a reminder chime whenyou open the driver’s door.

Turn signalOffParking and indicator lightsAUTOHeadlights onHigh beamsFlash high beamsFog lights offFog lights on

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid reservoir as the wind-shield washer.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.

3.

4.

Turn Signal

Headlights

Turn Signal and Headlights

Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights

118

０６／０８／０２　１０：１６：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１２３　

－

－When the light switch is in either ofthese positions, the lights onindicator comes on as a reminder.

This indicator stays on if you leavethe lights on and turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I) orLOCK (0) position.

To switch from lowbeams to high beams, push the leftlever forward until you hear a click.The blue high beam indicator willcome on (see page ). Pull it backto return to low beams. To flash thehigh beams, pull the lever backlightly, then release it. The highbeams stay on as long as you holdthe lever back.

Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areassuch as long tunnels or parkingfacilities.

To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHTSENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page

.

Do not leave the light switch inAUTO if you will not be driving thevehicle for an extended period (aweek or more). You should also turnoff the lights if you plan to leave theengine idling or off for a long time.

The automatic lightingfeature turns on the headlights andall other exterior lights, when itsenses low ambient light.

To turn on automatic lighting, turnthe light switch to AUTO at any time.The lights will come on automaticallywhen the outside light level becomeslow (at dusk, for example). Thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. The lights and indicatorwill turn off automatically when thesystem senses high ambient light.

The lights will remain on when youturn off the ignition switch. They willturn off automatically when youremove the key and open the driver’sdoor. To turn them on again, eitherturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position or turn the light switchto .

70

103

Headlights

High Beams

AUTO

Instruments

andC

ontrols

119

０６／０８／０２　１０：１６：１９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１２４　

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.With the light switch in the AUTOposition, you can also use the foglights when the headlights turn onautomatically. They will go off whenthe headlights turn off.

The automatic lighting feature iscontrolled by a sensor located on topof the dashboard. Do not cover thissensor or spill liquids on it.

With the headlight switch off, thedaytime running lights come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and release theparking brake. They remain on untilyou turn the ignition switch off, evenif you set the parking brake.

When the headlights are on, thedaytime running lights are off.

Headlights

Daytime Running LightsFog Lights

120

LIGHT SENSOR

０６／０８／０２　１０：１６：２７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１２５　

If you turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position with theheadlight switch on, but do not openthe door and get out, the lights turnoff after 10 minutes (3 minutes, ifthe switch is in the ‘‘AUTO’’position).

The lights turn on again when youunlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightsgo off. With the driver’s door open,you will hear a lights-on reminderchime.

This feature turns off the headlights,all other exterior lights, and theinstrument panel lights within 15seconds after you remove the keyand close the driver’s door.

To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTOOFF TIMER’’ setting, see page .

The automatic lighting off featureactivates if you leave the headlightswitch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’position or if the lights are turned onby setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’position, and you remove the key,then open and close the driver’s door.

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRLSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display, there is aproblem with the daytime runninglight system. Take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked.

When the multi-information displayshows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, thedaytime running lights are off.Follow the procedure in the leftcolumn to turn them on.

102

Headlights

Automatic Lighting Off Feature

Instruments

andC

ontrols

121

０６／０８／０２　１０：１６：３４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１２６　

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side to side.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on. Pushing thisbutton also turns the mirror heaterson or off (see page ).

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button lights to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignition.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the vehicle.

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your vehicle is disabled.

154

Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning Button

Hazard Warning, Rear Window Defogger

122

０６／０８／０２　１０：１６：４２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１２７　

＋

＋－＋

－

The level of brightness is shown onthe multi-information display whileyou adjust it. It goes out 5 secondsafter you finish adjusting.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to

or . To cancel the glarereduction function, set thebrightness to the highest level, thenpress the button. You will hear abeep when it is canceled.

You can customize when the glarereduction function starts. To change‘‘AUTO INTERIORILLUMINATION’’, see page formore information.Adjust the brightness of the

instrument panel by pressing theor button. Press the button toincrease the brightness and thebutton to decrease it. You can adjustthe brightness with the headlightswitch on or off.

95

Instrument Panel Brightness

Instruments

andC

ontrols

123

０６／０８／０２　１０：１６：４８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１２８　

Make any steering wheeladjustments before you start driving.

Move the steering wheel in, out, up,or down by pushing and holding theadjustment switch in that direction.

Release the switch when thesteering wheel reaches the desiredposition. Make sure the steeringwheel points towards your chest, nottoward your face, and that you cansee the instrument panel gauges andindicators.

Steering Wheel Adjustments

124

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０６／０８／０２　１０：１６：５４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１２９　

When you remove the key from theignition switch, the steering wheelautomatically moves fully in and up.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thefuse for the power tilt and telescopicsteering wheel is removed, thepower tilt and telescopic steeringwheel system needs to be resetwhen you reconnect the battery orinstall the fuse.

Insert the key into the ignitionswitch, and remove it. The steeringwheel automatically moves fully inand up to let you know the system isreset.

To change the ‘‘AUTO TILT &TELESCOPE STEERING WHEEL’’setting, see page .

The steering wheel then returns toits original position when you insertthe key back in the ignition switch.

Steering wheel movement is alsocontrolled by the driving positionmemory system (see page ).155

99

Steering Wheel Adjustments

Instruments

andC

ontrols

125

０６／０８／０２　１０：１７：００　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１３０　

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the driver’sdoor lock. You can keep the glovebox locked when you leave yourvehicle and the valet key at a parkingfacility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Acura-approved key blanks. The valet key does not contain a

battery. Do not try to take it apart.

Keys and Locks

126

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTER KEYWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

VALET KEY(Light Gray)

U.S. Entertainment Packages andCanadian Elite Package models shown.

MDX, Technology, and SportPackages models shown.

０６／０８／０２　１０：１７：０８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１３１　

Always use the fully-extended keywhen you insert it to the ignitionswitch. If the key does not fullyextend, the immobilizer system maynot operate properly and preventsfrom starting the engine.

The key may come in contact withyour finger while being retracted orextended. Make sure your fingers donot touch the pivot of the key whenretracting or extending the key.

The master key can be retracted intothe remote transmitter. To use thekey, push the release button torelease the key from the transmitter.The key should be fully extended.To retract the key, push the releasebutton and at the same time push thekey into the remote transmitter untilit is securely latched.

Keys and Locks

Retractable Master Key

Instruments

andC

ontrols

127

Push

RELEASE BUTTON

U.S. Entertainment Packages andCanadian Elite Package models shown.

０６／０８／０２　１０：１７：１４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１３２　

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourdealer.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine will notstart.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keychain) is near the ignition switchwhen you insert the key.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

128

０６／０８／０２　１０：１７：２２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１３３　

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key to the LOCK (0)position, the shift lever must be inPark, and you must push the key inslightly.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

Ignition Switch

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Instruments

andC

ontrols

129

０６／０８／０２　１０：１７：２９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１３４　

To lock all doors and the tailgate,press the bottom of the master doorlock switch on either front door, pullthe lock tab above the driver’s doorhandle, or use the key on the outsidelock on the driver’s door.

Pressing the top of either masterdoor lock switch will unlock all doorsand the tailgate.

All doors and the tailgate can belocked from the outside by using thekey in the driver’s door lock. Tounlock only the driver’s door, insertthe key, turn the key, and release it.The remaining doors and the tailgateunlock when you turn the key asecond time within a few seconds.

To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTEUNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page

.

When the vehicle speed reachesabout 10 mph (about 15 km/h) ormore, all the doors lockautomatically.

To change the ‘‘AUTO DOORLOCK’’ setting, see page .

When you shift to P after driving, thedriver’s door unlocks.

To change the ‘‘AUTO DOORUNLOCK’’ setting, see page .

The lock tab on any passenger’s doorlocks and unlocks that door.

109

106

107

Door Locks

130

UNLOCK

LOCK

LOCK

UNLOCK

０６／０８／０２　１０：１７：３８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１３５　

CONTINUED

With any door and the tailgate openand the key in the ignition, bothmaster door lock switches aredisabled. They are not disabled if allthe doors and the tailgate are closed.If you try to lock an open driver’sdoor by pulling the lock tab rearwardthe lock tab on the driver’s door popsout.

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.

To open the tailgate, push up insidethe handle, then lift up. To close thetailgate, use the inner handle to pullit down, then press down on the backedge.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.58

Door Locks, Tailgate

Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks


Tailgate

Instruments

andC

ontrols

131

０６／０８／０２　１０：１７：４６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１３６　

The tailgate can also be closed bypressing the button on the tailgate. Ifyou press the button again while thetailgate is closing, you will hear threebeeps, and the tailgate will stopmoving, reverse direction, and stopat the fully opened position.

Press and hold the tailgate button onthe remote transmitter or the switchfor about 1 second to open or closethe tailgate. Each time you press thebutton on the remote transmitter orthe switch, you will hear a beep, andsome front and rear lights will flash.

If you push the same button orswitch again while the tailgate isopening or closing, you will hearthree beeps, and the tailgate will stopmoving, reverse direction, and stopat the fully opened or closed position.

The tailgate can be opened andclosed with the remote transmitter(see page ) or the switch in thedriver’s door pocket when both frontdoors are unlocked.

135

U.S. Entertainment Packages andCanadian Elite Package models

Power Tailgate

Tailgate

132

TAILGATE SWITCHPOWER TAILGATE SWITCH

０６／０８／０２　１２：４２：１６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１３７　

The power tailgate has an auto-reverse feature. If it meetsresistance while opening or closing,it will beep three times and reversedirection. However, the tailgate maynot reverse immediately. Alwaysmake sure passengers and objectsare clear of the tailgate beforeopening or closing it.

Also check that passengers,especially children, do not have theirhands on the edge of the tailgate oron the tailgate sill. The auto reversefeature stops working when thetailgate is about to latch so the motorcan pull the tailgate shut.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, goes dead, or the fuseis removed while the tailgate is fullyopen, the power tailgate needs to bereset. After connecting the batteryor installing the fuse, close thetailgate fully by hand.

The power tailgate may not open orclose under the these conditions:

When the tailgate or the roof iscovered with snow or ice.

Do not install any accessories on thetailgate. It may cause the tailgate notto function properly. If there is snowor ice on the tailgate, make sure toremove it before you operate thetailgate.

The tailgate has sensors on bothsides. Be careful not to damage them.If the sensors are damaged, thepower tailgate does not functionproperly.

When the vehicle is swayed in astrong wind.

The vehicle is parked on a steephill.

If you push the tailgate releasebutton inside the handle while thetailgate is opening or closing, it willstop moving. You need to open orclose it the rest of the way manually.

Auto-Reverse

Tailgate

Instruments

andC

ontrols

133

Closing a power tailgate whileanyone is in the path of thetailgate can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure everyone is clearbefore closing the powertailgate.

０６／０８／０２　１０：１８：０２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１３８　

Push the release lever to the right asshown.

If you need to unlock the tailgatemanually, it means there is aproblem with the tailgate. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

If you try to drive off with thetailgate not closed completely, abeeper sounds and a ‘‘DOOR &TAILGATE OPEN’’ message isshown on the multi-informationdisplay.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.

If there is a problem in the powertailgate system, you will see a‘‘CHECK POWER TAILGATE’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. Have the system checked byyour dealer.

With this message shown on themulti-information display, you canstill open or close the tailgatemanually.

If the power door lock system cannotunlock the tailgate, unlock itmanually.

Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the cover on the back of thetailgate.

58


Unlocking the Tailgate


Tailgate

134

０６／０８／０２　１０：１８：１０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１３９　

－If you cannot open the tailgate,remove the cover on the back of thetailgate (see page ). Push therelease lever to the right as shown,then pull the outer handle to openthe tailgate.

Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior lights will flash. When youpush LOCK twice within 5 seconds,you will hear a beep to verify that thedoors and tailgate are locked and thesecurity system has set. This buttondoes not work if any door or tailgateis not fully closed.

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ setting,see page .

134110

CONTINUED

MDX, Technology, and Sport Packagesmodels

Tailgate, Remote Transmitter

LOCK

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

135

UNLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON


MDX, Technology, and SportPackages models

TAILGATEBUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：１８：１８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１４０　

－－

－

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors.Some exterior lights will flash twicewhen you push the button. If you donot open any door or the tailgatewithin 30 seconds, they willautomatically relock.

To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTEUNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page

.

To change the ‘‘SECURITYRELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page

.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton, the front and rear individualmap lights and the cargo area light,depending on their switch positions,will come on (see page ). If youdo not open any door or the tailgate,the lights stay on for about 30seconds, then go out. If you relockthe doors and the tailgate with theremote transmitter before 30seconds have elapsed, the lights willgo off immediately.

Press and hold thisbutton for about 1 second to attractattention; the horn will sound andthe exterior lights will flash for about30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,press any other button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Panicmode does not work when the key isin the ignition switch.

Press and hold theTAILGATE button to open or closethe power tailgate. When the tailgatebegins to move, you will hear a beep,and some front and rear lights willflash.

158

109

111


Remote Transmitter

UNLOCK PANIC

TAILGATE

136

０６／０８／０２　１０：１８：２５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１４１　

If you push the same button again while the tailgate is opening or closing, three beeps sound, the tailgate stops moving, reverses direction and stops in the fully opened or fully closed position.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the keypad from thetransmitter by pushing any buttonfrom outside.

Battery type: CR1616

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

137

KEYPADSCREW

０６／０８／０２　１０：１８：３５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１４２　

－

Remove the old battery and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing up), theninsert it in the keypad.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

Snap the two halves of the keypad,then install the parts in reverseorder.Place a cloth on the edge of the

keypad, and remove the upper halfby carefully prying on the edgewith a small flat-tip screwdriver.

4.

5.

3.




Remote Transmitter

138

BATTERY

０６／０８／０２　１０：１８：４２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１４３　

Here are the settings activated withthe remote;

Driving position memory(see page ).

When you unlock the driver’s doorwith your remote, each remoteactivates the keyless memorysettings related to that remote. Thedriver’s ID (MEMORY 1 orMEMORY 2) is shown on the backof each remote.

You will also see the ‘‘WELCOMEDRIVER 1’’ or ‘‘WELCOMEDRIVER 2’’ message on the multi-information display, depending onwhich linked remote transmitter isused.

To turn off this feature, press andhold the LOCK and UNLOCKbuttons at the same time. The LEDin the remote will blink twice. Thenrelease the buttons. Doing thiscancels the keyless memory settingsfor that remote and restores thedefault settings.

To turn the keyless memory settingsback on, repeat this procedure. TheLED will blink once to indicate thefeature has been turned on.

The steering wheel will move to thestored position when you insert thekey into the ignition switch.

When you unlock and open thedriver’s door with the remotetransmitter, the driver’s seat (exceptthe power lumbar feature) and outside mirrors start to move to the positions stored in memory. Theindicator in the related memorybutton to the remote comes on.

Audio system settings(see page ).

Climate control settings(see page ).

Customized settings(see page ).83

155

198

169

Keyless Memory Settings

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

139

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：１８：５３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１４４　

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

12 14

The controls for the poweradjustable front seats are on theoutside edge of each seat bottom.You can adjust the seats with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Moves the seat forwardand backward.

Raises or lowers the seat.

The passenger seat has the sameadjustments as the driver’s seat butwithout any lumbar adjustment.

Moves the whole seat upand forward, or downand backward. The frontof the seat also tilts up ordown at the same time.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Increases or decreasesthe lumbar support.(Driver’s seat only)

Moves the front of theseat up or down.

Seats

Front Seat Power Adjustments

140

０６／０８／０２　１０：１９：０５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１４５　

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

14

The front and the second row outerhead restraints adjust for height.The head restraints in the secondrow center and third row seatingpositions can be positioned in thefully lowered or fully raised position.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

To remove one for cleaning or repair,push the release button, and lift therestraint up.

Make sure the head restraint locksin position when you reinstall it.

CONTINUED

Head Restraints

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

141

RELEASE BUTTON

FRONT

０６／０８／０２　１０：１９：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１４６　

When a passenger is seated in thesecond row center or a third rowseating position, make sure thecenter head restraint is properlypositioned.

To change the seat-back angle of theseats in the second row, pull up onthe handle on the outside of the seat-back, and push the seat-back.

Overall, the seat-back has sixdifferent positions.

To unlatch the detachable anchorbefore folding the seat-back, insertthe latch plate into the slot on theside of the anchor buckle andallow the seat belt to retract. Storethe detachable anchor and seatbelt latch plates in the retractorhousing.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to the upright position. Makesure the seat is locked securelybefore driving.

Fold the seat-back forward.

Pull up the handle on the outsideof the seat-back.

Lower the head restraints to theirlowest positions.

The left and right halves can befolded separately.

2.

3.

1.

4.

Folding the Second SeatAdjusting the Second Seat

Seats

142

HANDLE

SECOND CENTER AND THIRD ROW

RELEASE BUTTON

０６／１１／０８　１０：００：１０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１４７　

To get into the third row seats, pullup the lever on the side of thepassenger’s side second row seat-back. The seat-back will tilt forward,and then can be slid forward.

After you return the seat-back to theupright position, push the whole seatbackwards until it latches. Makesure the seat is fully latched beforesitting in it.

Use the latch plate to release theseat belt from the detachableanchor.

Lower the head restraints to theirlowest positions.

To fold the third row seat,the second row seat-back must befolded down or completely up right.

Unlock the seat-back by pullingthe handle. Push the seat-backforward.

Make sure the outer shoulder beltsare positioned on each hookwhenever the third seat is folded.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Third Row Access Folding the Third Row Seat

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

143

NOTE:

THIRD SEAT HANDLE

RELEASE LEVER

０６／０８／０２　１０：１９：３２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１４８　

When the seats are returned to theupright position, these detachableanchors should be latched backproperly.

The seat belts in the second rowcenter seat and the third row seatsare equipped with detachableanchors.

To unlatch the detachable anchor,insert the latch plate into the slot onthe side of the anchor buckle. Storethe detachable anchor and seat beltlatch plates in the retractor housing.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to the upright position. Makesure the seat is locked securelybefore driving. Reconnect the seatbelts to the detachable anchors.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard (Seeon page ).324

Detachable Anchor

Carrying Cargo

Seats

144

LATCH PLATE

Using a seat belt with thedetachable anchor unlatchedincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachableanchor is correctly latched.

０６／０８／０２　１０：１９：４０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１４９　

Pull out the small latch plate and thelatch plate from each holding slot inthe ceiling, and pull out the seat beltto extend it.

Pull out the outer shoulder beltsfrom the hook. Both of the third-rowhooks should only be used when theseat belt is detached.

Line up the triangle marks on thesmall latch plate and anchor bucklewhen reattaching the belt and buckle.

Tug on the seat belt to verify thatthe detachable anchor is securelylatched. Make sure the seat belt isnot twisted.

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

145

SMALL LATCH PLATE

LATCH PLATE

SECOND ROW CENTER SEAT

HOOK

ANCHOR BUCKLE

TRIANGLEMARKS

THIRD ROW SEATS SMALL LATCH PLATE

０６／０８／０２　１０：１９：４７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１５０　

The outer second row seat cushionsand seat-backs are equipped withseat heaters. Turning the switch onthe driver side warms the outer seatbehind the driver’s seat only. Thepassenger side switch warms theouter seat behind the frontpassenger seat.

The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use them. Pushthe front of the switch, HI, to rapidlyheat up the seat. After the seatreaches a comfortable temperature,select LO by pushing the back of theswitch. This will keep the seat warm.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seat isonly heated in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag off system.


Seat Heaters

146

LOW

HI

Front seat Second row seatHEATERS

Passenger’sSeat

Driver’sSeat

０６／０８／０２　１２：４２：２２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１５１　

－

CONTINUED

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

To open either frontwindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down to the seconddetent, then release it. The windowautomatically goes down all the way.To stop the window from going allthe way down, pull back on thewindow switch briefly.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

In the LO setting, the heater runscontinuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

Follow these precautions when usingthe seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

AUTO

Seat Heaters, Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

147

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

０６／０８／０２　１０：２０：０２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１５２　

－ If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function may be disabled. Ifthe AUTO function is disabled, thepower window system will need to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor about 2 seconds.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

If either frontwindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

To close either front window fully,pull back the window switch firmlyto the second detent, then release it.The window automatically goes allthe way up. To stop the window fromgoing all the way up, push down onthe window switch briefly.

When you push the MAIN switch in,the switch is off, and the passengerwindows cannot be raised or lowered.To cancel this feature, push on theswitch again to get it to pop out.Keep the MAIN switch off when youhave children in the vehicle so theydo not injure themselves byoperating the windowsunintentionally.

1.

2.

AUTO REVERSE

Power Windows

148

０６／０８／０２　１０：２０：０９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１５３　

You can open and close the windowsand moonroof with the key in thedriver’s door lock.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows andmoonroof start to open. To stopthe windows and the moonroof,release the key.

When the windows or moonroofstops before opening fully, to openthe windows and moonroof further,turn and hold the key again(within 5 seconds).

To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows and the moonroof start toclose. To stop the windows andthe moonroof, release the key.

To open:

You can open all of the windows andthe moonroof from outside with theremote transmitter.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. All thedoors unlock, and all four windowsand moonroof start to open. Tostop the windows and moonroof,release the button.

To open the windows andmoonroof further, press thebutton again and hold it. If thewindows and the moonroof stopbefore the desired position, repeatsteps 1 and 2.

You cannot close the windows or themoonroof with the remotetransmitter.

1.

2.

2.

3.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.1.

CONTINUED

Power Windows, Moonroof

Opening/Closing the Windowsand Moonroof with the Key

Opening the Windows andMoonroof with the RemoteTransmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

149

０６／０８／０２　１０：２０：２２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１５４　

To close the windows andmoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 5 seconds).

To open the moonroof fully, pullback the moonroof switch firmly.The moonroof opens all the way. Tostop the moonroof from openingfully, push the switch briefly.

To tilt up the moonroof, push on thecenter of the moonroof switch. Tostop the moonroof from tilting upfully, push the switch briefly.

To open or close the moonroofpartially, pull back or push forwardthe moonroof switch lightly and holdit. The moonroof will stop when yourelease the switch.

To close the moonroof fully, firmlypush the moonroof switch forward,then release it. The moonroofautomatically closes all the way. Tostop the moonroof from closing,push the switch briefly.

NOTE: If the windows and moonroofstop before the desired position,repeat steps 2 and 3.

4. Moonroof

Power Windows, Moonroof

150

MOONROOF SWITCH

０６／０８／０２　１０：２０：２９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１５５　

Auto reverse does not work whenclosing the windows and moonroof with the key.

You can open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch.Opening either front door cancelsthis function.

To apply the parking brake, push thepedal down with your foot. Torelease it, pull the release handlefully. The parking brake indicator onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased, and the ignition switch is inthe ON (II) position (see page ).

If the moonroof runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close themoonroof, remove the obstacle, thenuse the moonroof switch again.Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.

129

CONTINUED

Parking BrakeAuto Reverse

Moonroof, Parking Brake

Instruments

andC

ontrols

151

RELEASE HANDLE

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.

０６／０８／０２　１０：２０：３７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１５６　

Auto reverse does not work whenclosing the windows and moonroof with the key.

You will also see a "RELEASE PARKING BRAKE" message on the multi-information display (see page 82).

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

On U.S. models

Mirrors

Parking Brake, Mirrors

152

U.S. models

TAB

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will soundif the vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

０６／０８／０２　１０：２０：４３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１５７　

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this sensing.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

1.

2.

On Canadian models

CONTINUED

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

153

Canadian models

SELECTORSWITCH

AUTO BUTTON

INDICATOR

SENSOR

There is also a sensor on the back ofthe mirror. Items hung on the mirrormay block this sensor and af f ectperf ormance.

０６／０８／０２　１０：２０：５０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１５８　

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

Depending on the position of theselector switch, the left or right sidemirror will pivot downward slightlywhen you shift the transmission intoreverse. In the left position, the leftmirror pivots. In the right position,the right mirror pivots. This givesyou a better view of that side of thevehicle while parallel parking. Themirror returns to its original positionwhen you take the transmission outof reverse. To turn this feature off,leave the switch in the centerposition.

Outside mirror positions can bestored in the driving positionmemory system (see page ).

4.

3.

155

Mirrors

Heated Mirrors

154

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：２０：５７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１５９　

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ).

Store a driving position only whenthe vehicle is parked.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. You cannot add anew driving position to thememory unless the ignition switchis in the ON (II) position. You canrecall a memorized position withthe ignition switch in any position.

Your vehicle has a memory featurefor the steering wheel, driver’s seat,and outside mirror positions.

Seat, except for power lumbar,steering wheel and outside mirrorpositions can be stored in separatememories. You select a memorizedposition by pushing the appropriatebutton or using the appropriateremote transmitter (Driver 1 orDriver 2). For more information seepage .

Press and release the MEMObutton on the control panel. Youwill hear a beep. Immediatelypress and hold one of the memorybuttons (1 or 2) until you hear twobeeps. The indicator in thememory button will come on. Thecurrent positions of the driver’sseat, steering wheel, and outsidemirrors are now stored.

Adjust the steering wheel to acomfortable position (see page

).Adjust the outside mirrors for bestvisibility (see page ).

3.

1.

2.139

124

140

153

CONTINUED

Storing a Driving Position inMemory

Driving Position Memory System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

155

MEMO BUTTON

MEMORY BUTTONS

０６／０８／０２　１０：２１：０６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１６０　

Doing any of the following afterpressing the MEMO button willcancel the storing procedure.

Not pressing a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

Readjusting the seat position.

Readjust the outside mirrorposition.

Each memory button stores only onedriving position. Storing a newposition erases the previous settingstored in that button’s memory. Ifyou want to add a new position whileretaining the current one, use theother memory button.

To select a memorized position, dothis:

To stop the system’s automaticadjustment, do any of these actions:

Press any button on the controlpanel: MEMO, 1, or 2.Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat.Shift out of Park.Adjust the outside mirrors.

Make sure the vehicle is parked.

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, thenrelease the button.

To change the ‘‘MEMORYPOSITION LINK’’ setting, see page

.

If desired, you can use theadjustment switches to change thepositions of the seat, steering wheelor outside mirrors after they are intheir memorized position. If youchange the memorized position, theindicator in the memory button willgo out. To keep this driving positionfor later use, you must store it in thedriving position memory.

The system will move the seat,steering wheel, and outside mirrorsto the memorized positions. Theindicator in the selected memorybutton will flash during movement.When the adjustments are complete,you will hear two beeps, and theindicator will remain on.

1.

2.

98

Selecting a Memorized Position

Driving Position Memory System

156

０６／０８／０２　１０：２１：１８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１６１　

The individual map lights in thefront can be turned on and off bypressing the lenses.

The light control switch has threepositions: OFF, Door Activated, andON.

With any door or the tailgate leftopen, the lights stay on about 3minutes, then go out.

After all doors are closed tightly, thelights dim slightly, then fade out inabout 30 seconds.

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page

.

The lights also come on when thekey is removed from the ignitionswitch.

The individual map lights in thesecond row and the cargo arealight in the third row cannot beturned on.

The individual map lights in thefront and second rows come onwhen any door or the tailgate isopened, or when the remotetransmitter is used to unlock thedoors (see page ). When thedoors and the tailgate are closed,each light can be turned on and offby pushing the lens.

The cargo area light comes onwhen any door or the tailgate isopened if the light control switchis in the door activated (center)position. When the doors and thetailgate are closed, the cargo arealight can be turned on with theswitch in the light.

The individual door lights or thetailgate lights will operate when adoor or the tailgate is opened.

136

101

When the switch is in the OFF position:

When the switch is in the door activatedposition:

CONTINUED

Light Control Switch

Interior Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

157

DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION

ON

OFF

０６／０８／０２　１０：２１：２９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１６２　

＋－

When the light control switch is in theposition:ON

All the individual map lights comeon and stay on as long as theswitch remains in the ON position.

The cargo (3rd row) area lightcomes on if the switch is in thedoor activated position.

Turn on the front row individual maplights by pushing the lens. Push thelens again to turn it off. With thelight control switch in the dooractivated position, the second rowmap lights can be turned on bypushing the lens. Push the lens againto turn it off.

The courtesy light between the maplights comes on when you turn theparking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, press either of theinstrument panel brightness controlbuttons ( or ).

Individual Map Lights

Interior Lights

158

FRONT

COURTESY LIGHT

０６／０８／０２　１０：２１：３６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１６３　

The courtesy lights in all four doorscome on when you open any door.The light around the ignition switchcomes on when any door is opened.After you close the door, the ignitionswitch light stays on for about 30seconds regardless of the interiorlight dimming time setting (see page

).

The lights in the tailgate have an on-off switch to control if the lightscome on when the tailgate is opened.The tailgate lights do not come onwhen any other doors are opened.

The cargo area light has a three-position switch. In the OFF position,the light does not come on. In thecenter position, it comes on whenyou open the tailgate. In the ONposition, it stays on continuously.

101

Interior Lights

Individual Interior LightsTailgate LightsCargo Area Light

Instruments

andC

ontrols

159

ON

OFF

０６／０８／０２　１０：２１：４２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１６４　

Interior Convenience Items

160

GLOVE BOX

SUN VISOR VANITY MIRROR

SUNGLASSES HOLDER COAT HOOK

GROCERY HOOK

ACCESORY POWER SOCKETARMREST/BEVERAGE HOLDER

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

CENTER POCKET

ACCESORYPOWER SOCKET

BEVERAGE HOLDER

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

０６／０８／０２　１２：４２：２７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１６５　

The center seat-back in the second isequipped with an armrest thatprovides the beverage holder. Pivotdown the seat-back to use them.

To open the beverage holder, pressand release the front lid. To close,press the lid again until it latches.When you put back the armrest inthe center seat-back, make sure thelid is closed properly.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you open or close thedoors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

Open the front beverage holder bysliding the lid.

Beverage Holders


Instruments

andC

ontrols

161

ARMREST BEVERAGE HOLDER

FRONT LID

０６／０８／０２　１０：２１：５４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１６６　

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush. Lock or unlock the glove boxwith the master key.

The storage compartment with asliding lid is at the left-side foot ofthe front passenger seat.

For the third row, a storagecompartment is located in thepassenger side armrest. To open thecompartment, push the button andlift the lid.

Your vehicle is equipped with a frontseat armrest pad that is also aconsole compartment. To open theconsole compartment fully, pushboth buttons at the front of thecompartment.


Glove BoxConsole Compartment Storage Compartment

162

LID

LIDS

BUTTONS

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

０６／０８／０２　１０：２２：０２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１６７　

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the raised detent. It will unlatchand swing down. To close it, push ituntil it latches. Make sure the holderis closed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.

The hooks on the floor of the cargoarea enable you to tie down itemsstored in the back. Make sure allstored items are secured beforedriving.

Sunglasses Holder Cargo Hooks


Instruments

andC

ontrols

163

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

PUSH

HOOK

０６／０８／０２　１０：２２：１０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１６８　

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out.

Your vehicle has two or threeaccessory power sockets, dependingon the model. All models have thefront accessory power socket underthe audio system and rear socketbehind the third row seat on thedriver’s side.

To use the vanity mirror on the backof the sun visor, pull up the cover.

The vanity mirror light will not comeon if the sun visor is slid outward.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

In this position, the sun visor can beadjusted by moving it on its slider.Do not use the extended sun visorover the inside mirror.


Sun Visor Vanity Mirror Accessory Power Sockets

164

SUN VISOR

Slide

０６／０８／０２　１０：２２：１８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１６９　

Each socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

The accessory power socket islocated at the back of the frontconsole compartment.

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

There is a 115 volt AC power outletinside the front consolecompartment. To use the AC poweroutlet, open the lids and open theoutlet cover. Insert the plug into thereceptacle slightly, turn it 90°clockwise, then push in the plug allthe way.

CONTINUED


MDX, Technology, and Sport Packagesmodels

AC Power Outlet


Instruments

andC

ontrols

165

０６／０８／０２　１０：２２：２６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１７０　

Always run the engine when you usethe AC power outlet.

The maximum capacity for thispower outlet is 115 volt AC at 100watts or less. If you use an appliancewhich requires more than 100 watts,it automatically stops supplying thepower. If this happens, turn theignition switch off and turn it onagain.

The AC power outlet is notdesigned for electric applianceswhich require high initial peakwattage such as cathode-ray tubetype televisions, refrigerators,electric pumps, etc. It is also notsuitable for devices that processprecise data such as medicalequipment or measuring instruments.Any appliances that require anextremely stable power supply suchas microcomputer-controlled electricblankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,should not be connected to thisoutlet.


166

NOTE:

０６／０８／０２　１０：２２：３０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１７１　

The climate control system in yourvehicle provides a comfortabledriving environment in all weatherconditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

...............Climate Control System . 168..................Rear Climate Controls . 173

................................Audio System . 178Playing the AM/FM Radio

(Models without navigation..................................system) . 179

.Playing the XM Satellite Radio . 183.................................Playing Discs . 188

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 197Audio System (Models with

...................navigation system) . 198..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 199

............................Radio Reception . 203.Playing the XM Satellite Radio . 208

.................................Playing Discs . 216...Disc Changer Error Messages . 226

..................Protecting Your Discs . 227......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 228

................Remote Audio Controls . 229.................Radio Theft Protection . 231

..Setting the Clock and Calendar . 232........Rear Entertainment System . 233

............................Security System . 265...............................Cruise Control . 266

.........................................Compass . 269

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 272

..........................HandsFreeLink . 276......................................AcuraLink . 303

.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 314

Features

Features

167

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：２２：３５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１７２　

Climate Control System

FRONT CONTROL PANEL

REAR CONTROL PANEL

168

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

OFF BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

MODE BUTTONDUAL BUTTONREAR BUTTON

REAR PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE

AUTO BUTTON MODE BUTTON

AUTO SYNC INDICATOR

AUTO INDICATOR

FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATUREDRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE

FRONT PASSENGER’SSIDE TEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROLBUTTONS

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON

REAR PASSENGERCOMPARTMENTTEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

OFF BUTTON

FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：２２：４２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１７３　

▲

▼

When you unlock the doors withyour remote, the driver’s ID (Driver1 or Driver 2) is detected, and theclimate control settings are turned tothe respective mode automaticallywhen the ignition is turned to theON (II) position.

The climate control system can alsobe operated by voice control. See theNavi section in your quick startguide for an overview of this system,and the navigation system manualfor complete details.

Press the Auto button on the frontcontrol panel.

Set the desired temperature withthe temperature control buttons.You will see AUTO in the system’sdisplay.

The automatic climate controlsystem in your vehicle picks theproper combination of airconditioning, heating, and ventilationto maintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and airflow levels.

You can set the driver’s sidetemperature, the passenger’s sidetemperature, and the temperatureof the rear passengercompartment separately.

The system automatically selectsthe proper mix of conditionedand/or heated air that will, asquickly as possible, raise or lowerthe interior temperature to yourpreference.

The driver’s side temperature, thepassenger’s side temperature andthe rear passenger compartmenttemperature can be set separately.Press the button of theappropriate temperature control toincrease the temperature of airflow.Press the button to decrease it.Each set temperature is shown in thedisplay. The rear temperature isshown in the display on the back ofthe center console.

1.

2.

3.

On vehicles with navigation system

CONTINUED

Personalization Setting

Voice Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control


Temperature Control Features

169

０６／０８／０２　１０：２２：５２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１７４　

When you press a fan control button,the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.

When the indicator in the dualbutton is on, the driver’s side andpassenger’s side temperature can becontrolled independently (see page

).

When the indicator in the rearbutton is on, the temperature of therear passenger compartment can becontrolled independently (see page

).

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

When you press this button, theindicator in the button comes on, andthe temperature of the rearpassenger compartment can beadjusted separately with thetemperature control buttons on theback of the center console. With theindicator off, the temperature of therear passenger compartment issynchronized to the driver’s side settemperature. You will see the AUTOSYNC on the system display of therear control panel. Changing thetemperature of the rear passengercompartment also makes theindicator to turn on, and takes thesystem out of synchronized mode.This causes the word SYNC in thedisplay to go out.

In the Auto mode, the vehicle’sinterior temperature isindependently regulated for thedriver, front passenger, and rear

passengers according to eachadjusted temperature. The systemalso regulates each temperaturebased on the information of the sunlight sensor and the sun positionwhich is updated automatically bythe navigation’s global positioningsystem (GPS). For example, if thedriver’s side of the vehicle getting tomuch sun, the system will adjust to alower temperature.

You can set the temperatures for thedriver’s side and the passenger’s sideseparately when this button ispressed (indicator is on). When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,the temperatures for both sides aresynchronized to the driver’s side settemperature. When defrost mode isselected, dual mode operation iscanceled.

175

175



Rear Button

Dual Button

170

０６／０８／０２　１０：２３：０１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１７５　

▲

▼

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

If you press the OFF button, theclimate control system shuts offcompletely.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times. Press the button to increase

the fan speed and airflow. Press thebutton to decrease it.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control below theoutside temperature.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

The outside air intakes for theclimate control system are at thebase of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.


Semi-automatic OperationTo Turn Everything Off

Fan Control

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button

Features

171

０６／０８／０２　１０：２３：１３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１７６　

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

When the indicator in the button ison, the front passenger’s and rearpassenger compartmenttemperatures cannot be setseparately from the driver’s.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor and corner vents and thedefroster vents at the base of thewindshield.

This button directs the main airflowto the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anymode selection you may have made.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease airflow to the windshield byclosing the corner vents on thedashboard. To close the vents, rotatethe wheel under each corner vent.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Pushing this button also turns thepower mirror heaters on and off.

Use the mode control button toselect the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

122


Windshield Defroster Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control

172

０６／０８／０２　１０：２３：２６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１７７　

When the indicator in this button isoff, the temperature of the rearpassenger compartment issynchronized to the driver’s side settemperature. If the AUTO mode isselected on the front control panel,you will see the AUTO SYNC on therear system display. When theindicator in this button is on, thetemperature of the rear passengercompartment can be adjusted with

the rear temperature control buttons.A passenger can also adjust the fanspeed and airflow.

You can use the rear control panelwhen the indicator in the REARbutton on the front control panel ison. Pressing any control button onthe rear control panel turns on therear button indicator on the frontcontrol panel.

CONTINUED

REAR Climate Controls


Rear Button

Features

173

REAR CONTROL PANEL

REAR BUTTON

REAR PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE

REAR PASSENGERCOMPARTMENTTEMPERATURECONTROLBUTTONS

OFF BUTTON

FANCONTROLBUTTONS

AUTO BUTTON MODE BUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：２３：３３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１７８　

▲

▼

▲

▼

Press the fan control buttonto increase the fan speed and airflow.Press the button todecrease it. The level of the fanspeed is shown in the display.

Press the temperature controlbutton to increase the temperatureof airflow, and the button todecrease it. The temperature youadjust is shown in the system display.

Pressing the AUTO button puts thesystem in automatic operation mode.The rear system automaticallyadjusts the fan speed and airflowlevels to maintain the selectedtemperature of the rear passengercompartment. You will see AUTO inthe display.

Pressing the OFF button shuts offthe rear climate control system.

Each time you press the modebutton, the mode display changesfrom to .

When is selected, air flowsfrom the upper vents on the back ofthe center console.

When is selected, air flowsfrom the lower vents.

Fan Control

Mode Control

Temperature Control Automatic Operation


174

０６／０８／０２　１０：２３：４５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１７９　

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

The temperatures of the driver’s sideand the front passenger’s side can becontrolled independently when theindicator in the DUAL button is on.

When the indicator in the REARbutton is on, the temperature of therear passenger compartment can becontrolled independently.

To adjust each temperature, presseither of the temperature controlbuttons ( or ) on the climatecontrol panel.


Triple Zone Temperature Control

Features

175

Driver’s Side Passenger’s Side

Rear Passenger Comparment

０６／０８／０２　１０：２３：５１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１８０　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Push AUTO or . The selectedtemperatures appear in the display.When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, you can adjust bothsides to the same temperature byadjusting the driver’s temperaturecontrol buttons.

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s side, press the DUALbutton, then press either of thedriver’s temperature control button( or ). To set the passenger’s sideto a different value than the driver’sside, press either of the frontpassenger’s temperature controlbutton ( or ). You can adjust thepassenger’s side without pressingthe DUAL button first.

When the indicator in the REARbutton is off, the temperature of therear passenger compartment issynchronized to the driver’s side settemperature. You will see the AUTOSYNC on the system display of therear control panel.

To set the temperature of the rearpassenger compartment to adifferent value then the driver’s side,press the REAR button, then presseither temperature control buttonson the back of the center console.The word ‘‘SYNC’’ in the displaygoes out. You can also adjust therear temperature without pressingthe REAR button first. Pressingeither button causes the indicator ofthe REAR button to turn on.

When you set each temperature toits lower limit or its upper limit, it willbe displayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.


176

０６／０８／０２　１０：２３：５７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１８１　

To regulate the interior temperatureand humidity, the climate controlsystem has two sensors. A sunlightsensor is located in the top of thedashboard and a temperature/humidity sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or, spill liquid or spraychemical cleaners on the sensors.

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors


Features

177

TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

０６／０８／０２　１０：２４：０２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１８２　

An audio system is standard on allmodels. Read the appropriate pages(as shown below) to use yourvehicle’s audio system.

For vehicles without navigationsystem, see pages through .

For vehicles with navigation system,see pages through .

179 197

198 226

Audio System

178

Without navigation system

With navigation system With rear entertainment system

０６／１１／０８　１０：００：５７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１８３　

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Features

179

TUNE KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

SEEK BUTTONS

PRESET BUTTONS

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

FM BUTTON

AM BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

０６／１１／０８　１０：０１：０２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１８４　

－

－

－

＋－

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or SEEK button, thenrelease it.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.

On the AM band, AM noisereduction turns on automatically.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM orFM button. Adjust the volume byturning the power/volume knob. TUNE

To Select a Station SCAN

SEEK

To Play the Radio


180

０６／０８／０２　１０：２４：２８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１８５　

－－Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forthat preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

The presets may be lost if yourvehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

1.

2.

3.

4.

203

To turn off auto selectPreset AUTO SELECT


Features

181

０６／０８／０２　１０：２４：３７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１８６　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the TUNE knob toadjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,

choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the TUNE knob toadjust the setting to your liking.When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control buttons to adjustthe illumination of the audio system(see page ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

Adjusts thestrength of sound from thesubwoofer speaker.

Adjusts the strength ofsound from the center speaker.

Press the TUNE (SOUND) knobrepeatedly to display the BASS,TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE,SUBWOOFER, and SVC (speed-sensitive volume compensation)settings.

123

Adjusting the Sound

BASS

TREBLE

BALANCE

FADER

SVC

Audio System Lighting

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)


182

０６／０８／０２　１０：２４：４８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１８７　

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models without navigation system)

Features

183

TUNE KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

CATEGORY BUTTONS

DISP/MODE BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

XM RADIO BUTTON

０６／１１／０８　１０：０１：０８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１８８　

－

－

－＋－In the channel mode, you can selectall of the available channels. In thecategory mode, such as Jazz, Rock,Classical, etc., you can select all ofthe channels within that category.

Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the displaychanges in the following sequence:channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States, except Hawaii andAlaska.

Turn the TUNE knob tochange channel selections. Turn theknob right for higher numberedchannels and left for lowernumbered channels. In the categorymode, you can only select channelswithin that category.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

On Canadian models, you can alsoreceive XM Satellite Radio inCanada.

XM radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.

To listen to XM radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system, and press the ‘‘XM’’button. Adjust the volume by turning

the knob. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes.

Presseither button to select anothercategory.


TUNE

Operating the Satellite Radio

MODE

CATEGORY ( or )

184

０６／０８／０２　１０：２５：０４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１８９　

－

－

－

－

－

The SCAN function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the stations within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press thebutton again.

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

The presets may be lost if yourvehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

Once a channel is stored, simplypress and release the proper presetbutton to tune to it.

Press the XM button again. Theother XM band will show. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe button until you hear a beep.

Use the TUNE knob, or theCATEGORY or SCAN buttons totune to a desired channel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

3.

4.

5.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

SCAN

Preset

XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’


Features

185

０６／０８／０２　１０：２５：１５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１９０　

－

－

－

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist or is not partof your subscription, or this channelhas no artist or title information atthis time.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.


‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

186

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

０６／０８／０２　１０：２５：２２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１９１　

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the south side of aneast/west mountain road.Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSatellite Radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated,‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CH’’ will appear inthe display, and you’ll be able tolisten to XM Radio broadcasts. XMRadio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contact XMRadio.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM radioreception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position, push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system, and press the

button. A variety of musictypes and styles will play.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

Receiving Satellite Radio Service


Features

187

０６／０８／０２　１０：２５：３３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１９２　

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

188

SEEK BUTTONS

TRACK/FILE NUMBER

DISC SLOT

DISC LOAD BUTTON

POWER/VOLUM KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE (FOLDER) KNOB

FOLDERNUMBER

DISC EJECT BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

MP3/WMA INDICATOR

０６／１１／０８　１０：０２：０８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１９３　

You operate the disc changer withthe same controls used for the radio.To select the disc changer, press theDISC button. You will see ‘‘DISC’’ inthe display. The disc and tracknumbers, and the elapsed time areshown in the display. You can alsoselect the displayed information withthe DISP button (see page ). Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes.

This audio system can also play CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3or WMA formats. When playing adisc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ inthe display. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’will appear in the display. The disc,folder and track numbers aredisplayed. You can select up to 255folders or tracks.

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

Video CDs and DVD discs do notwork in this unit.

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz(MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbpsCompatible with variable bit rate andmulti-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:

Compatible with variable bit rate andmulti-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

Sampling frequency:22.051/32/44.1/48 kHzBit rate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

191

CONTINUED


To Play a Disc

Features

189

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０６／０８／０２　１０：２５：５０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１９４　

NOTE:If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays CD FORMAT, and thenskips to the next file.

Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changerholds up to six discs.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this unit.

When the disc load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in thedisplay again, insert the next discin the slot. Do not try to insert adisc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. Youcould damage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. If you are not loadingall six positions, the system beginsplaying the last disc loaded.

You can also load a disc into anempty position while a disc is playingby pressing the appropriate presetbutton. The system stops playing thecurrent disc and starts the loadingsequence. It then plays the disc justloaded.

Press the LOAD button until youhear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ inthe display. To load only one disc,press and release the LOADbutton.

The disc number for an emptyposition begins blinking.

Insert the disc into the disc slotwhen the green disc load indicatorcomes on. Insert it only abouthalfway; the drive will pull it in therest of the way. You will see‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while thedisc load indicator turns red andblinks as the disc is loaded.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.


Loading Discs

190

０６／０８／０２　１０：２５：５９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１９５　

＞

CONTINUED

If the text data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown. You can see up to about31 characters of the text data.

If you press and hold the DISPbutton again, the display shows thefirst 16 characters again.

If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.When the disc has no text data, youwill see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

When you turn on the audio systemnext time, the system keeps yourselection with the DISP button.

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.Each time you press the DISP button,

the display shows you the text dataon a disc, if the disc was recordedwith text data.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and thealbum, artist, and track tag.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

When you press and release theDISP button while a disc without textdata is playing, you will see ‘‘NOINFO’’ on the display.

The display shows up to about 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.).


Text Data Display Function

Features

191

０６／０８／０２　１０：２６：１０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１９６　

－

－＋

－

＋－

－

Use the seek buttons while a disc isplaying to select passages andchange tracks (files in MP3 or WMAmode).

In MP3 or WMA mode, use theTUNE knob to select folders in thedisc and use either seek button tochange files.

Tocontinuously replay a track (file inMP3 or WMA mode), press andrelease the RPT button. You will seeRPT in the display. Press and holdthe RPT button to turn it off.

Pressing either seek button alsoturns off the repeat feature.

Each time youpress and release the seek button,the player skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (file inMP3 or WMA mode). Press andrelease the seek button to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previous

track.

To move rapidly within a track or file,press and hold the or seekbutton.

To select a different disc, use theappropriate preset buttons (1through 6). If you select an emptyposition, the system will go into theloading sequence (see page ).

Toselect a different folder, turn theTUNE knob to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Turnthe knob to the right until it clicksonce to skip to the next folder, and tothe left to move to the beginning ofthe current folder. Turn it again toskip to the beginning of the previousfolder. Turning the TUNE knobmore than two clicks skips severalfolders.

190

In MP3 or WMA mode


REPEAT (Track Repeat)

SEEK/SKIP

FOLDER SELECTION

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

192

０６／０８／０２　１０：２６：１８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１９７　

－

－

－

－

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3 orWMA. To activate folder repeatmode, press and release the RPTbutton repeatedly until you seeF-RPT in the display. The systemcontinuously replays the currentfolder. Press and hold the RPTbutton to turn it off. Pressing theRDM button, or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE knob alsoturns off the repeat feature.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, to discrepeat then to normal playing.

This featurecontinuously replays the current disc.To active disc repeat, press andrelease the RPT button repeatedlyuntil you see D-RPT in the display.Press and hold the RPT button againto turn it off.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles within a current folder inrandom order, rather than in theorder they are compressed in MP3or WMA. To activate folder randomplay, press and release the RDMbutton repeatedly. You will see F-RDM in the display. The system willthen select and play files randomly.This continues until you deactivatefolder random play by pressing andholding the RDM button again, oryou select a different folder with theTUNE knob.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random play, to within adisc random play, then to normalplay.

This feature plays thetracks within a disc (the files in MP3or WMA mode) in random order. Toactivate random play, press andrelease the RDM button. In MP3 orWMA mode, press the RDM buttonrepeatedly to select RDM (within adisc random play). You will see RDMin the display. Press the RDM buttonfor 2 seconds to return to normalplay.

In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode


FOLDER REPEAT

DISC REPEAT

FOLDER RANDOM

RANDOM (Random within adisc)

Features

193

０６／０８／０２　１０：２６：２４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１９８　

－－

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc (all files in the selected folder inMP3 or WMA mode). To activate thescan feature, press and release theSCAN button. You will see SCAN inthe display. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track/file in thedisc/folder. Press and hold theSCAN button to get out of scanmode and play the last track sampled.

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first file ineach folder on the disc in the orderthey are recorded. To activate thefolder scan feature, press andrelease the SCAN button repeatedly.You will see F-SCAN in the display.The system will then play the firstfile in the main folders for about 10seconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then play the followingfirst files for 10 seconds each. Whenit plays a file that you want tocontinue listening to, press and holdthe SCAN button.

Pressing either seek button, orselecting a different disc (using thepreset buttons) or folder (using theTUNE knob) turns off the SCAN orF-SCAN feature.

In MP3 or WMA mode


SCANF-SCAN

194

０６／０８／０２　１０：２６：２８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０１９９　

－

CONTINUED

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first track ineach disc in order (the first file inthe main folder on each disc in MP3or WMA mode). To activate the discscan feature, press and release theSCAN button repeatedly until D-SCAN shows in the display. Thesystem will then play the first track/file in the first main folder in the firstdisc for about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system will then playthe following first tracks/files for 10seconds each. When it plays a track/file that you want to continuelistening to, press and hold theSCAN button again.

When the first track in the last disc,or the first file in the last main folderin the last disc begins to play, thedisc scan mode will be canceled.Pressing either seek button orselecting a different folder with theTUNE knob also turns off the scanfeature.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom scan, disc scan, then to normalplaying.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan, folder scan, disc scan,then to normal playing.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds. To beginplaying, press the DISC button.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM or FM button.Press the DISC button again toswitch back to the disc changer.In MP3 or WMA mode


D-SCAN To Stop Playing a Disc

Features

195

０６／０８／０２　１０：２６：３６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２００　

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

To remove the disc currently in play,press the eject button. When a disc isremoved from a slot, the systemautomatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherdisc in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 10 seconds, the disc willreload into the slot. Then the systemreturns to the previous mode (AM,FM, or XM).

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatdisc begins playing, press the ejectbutton. Continue pressing the ejectbutton to remove all the discs fromthe changer.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first.

227

Protecting Discs


Removing Discs from the In-dashDisc Changer

196

０６／０８／０２　１０：２６：４３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２０１　

－

－

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to your dealer.

CauseError Massage Solution

High temperature

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will skipped. The next supportedtrack or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt.Insert the disc again. If the code does notdisappear, or the disc(s) cannot be removed,consult your dealer. Do not try to force the discout of the player.

Disc Changer Error Message (Models without navigation system)

Features

197

HEAT ERROR

FORMAT

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNER’SMANUAL PUSH

EJECTBAD DISC

PLEASE CHECKOWNER’SMANUAL

０６／０８／０２　１０：２６：５０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２０２　

The selector can be pushed left,right, up, down, and in. Use theselector to scroll through lists, toselect menus, and to highlight menuitems. When you make a selection,push the center of the selector(ENTER) to go to that selection.

The knob turns left and right. Use itto make selections or adjustments toa list or menu on the screen.Most audio system functions can still

be controlled by standard buttons,dials, and knobs, but some functionscan only be accessed using theinterface dial. The interface dial hastwo parts, a knob and a selector.

When you unlock the doors withyour remote and turn the audiosystem on, the driver’s ID (Driver 1or Driver 2) is detected, and theradio presets and sound levelsettings (see page ) are turned tothe respective memorized modeautomatically.

The audio system can also beoperated by voice control. See theNavi section in your quick startguide for an overview of this system,and the navigation system manualfor complete details.

205

On models with navigation systemInterface Dial Personalization Setting

Voice Control System

Audio System (Models with navigation system)

198

KNOB ENTER

SELECTOR

０６／０８／０２　１０：２６：５８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２０３　

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

Features

199

SCANBUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

AUDIO DISPLAY

AUTO SELECTBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

AUDIOBUTTON

PRESETBUTTONS

TUNE KNOB

SEEKBUTTONS

AUDIO DISPLAY

SCANBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

AUDIOBUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

AUTOSELECTBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE KNOB

With rear entertainment systemWithout rear entertainment system

INTERFACE DIAL

SEEKBUTTONS

０６／１１／０８　１０：０２：１９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２０４　

－The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Press the AUDIO button toview the audio control display. Turnthe system on by pressing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are shown onthe display. To change bands, pressthe AM/FM button. You can alsochange bands by pushing theinterface selector up. Each time youpush it up, the band will change toFM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands,STEREO will be shown on thenavigation screen and ST on theaudio display, if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency. To tune with theinterface dial, push the selectordown, and turn the knob to TUNE.Then press ENTER on the selector,and turn the knob to the desiredfrequency. To exit the TUNE mode,press ENTER on the selector.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: thepreset buttons, and .

To Play the AM/FM Radio TUNETo Select a Station

TUNE, SEEK, SCAN,AUTO SELECT


200

STEREO ICON

TUNE ICON

BAND

０６／０８／０２　１０：２７：１５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２０５　

－

－＋

－

To scan with the interface dial, pushthe selector down, and then push itto the right. You will see SCANflashing on the screen.

The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and play itfor 10 seconds. When it plays astation that you want to listen to,press the scan button again, or pushthe interface selector to the rightagain.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or SEEK button, thenrelease it. You can also activateSEEK by pushing the interfaceselector to the right or left.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it.

CONTINUED

SEEK

SCAN


Features

201

SCAN ICON

０６／０８／０２　１０：２７：２１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２０６　

－

－ You can also press the A.SEL button.You will see AUTO SEL on thescreen, and the system goes intoscan mode for several seconds. Thesystem stores the frequencies of sixAM and twelve FM stations in thepreset buttons.

You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons (icons) as previouslydescribed.

To turn off auto select, pressENTER on the interface selector orpress the A.SEL button again. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Push the interface selector down toscroll down the screen, highlightA.SEL, then press ENTER on theinterface selector. You will seeAUTO SEL on the screen, and thesystem goes into scan mode forseveral seconds.

Each preset button orpreset icon can store one frequencyon AM and two frequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo sets of FM frequencies withthe preset buttons (on-screenicons).Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.Press the preset button, and holdit until you hear a beep. You canalso store frequencies with theinterface dial. Select the preseticon you want to store thefrequency on, then press ENTERon the interface selector, and holdit for more than 2 seconds.Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To store a preset memory location:

AUTO SELECT

Preset


202

AUTO SEL ICON

０６／０８／０２　１０：２７：３１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２０７　

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio Reception

Features

203

０６／０８／０２　１０：２７：４０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２０８　

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.


AM/FM Radio Reception

204

０６／０８／０２　１０：２７：４６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２０９　

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, andFADER are each adjustable. You canalso adjust the strength of the soundcoming from the center andsubwoofer speakers. In addition, youcan set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) IIand Speed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC).

Select the mode you want to adjustby turning the interface dial.

You can also adjust the sound bypushing the SOUND buttonrepeatedly. Each mode is shown inthe audio display as it changes. Turnthe TUNE knob to adjust the settingto your liking.

To adjust them, press the AUDIObutton, push the interface selectordown, and turn the interface knob toSOUND. Then press ENTER on theselector.

These adjustments can be made bythe SOUND button or the interfacedial.

CONTINUED


Adjusting the Sound

Features

205

SOUND ICON

０６／０８／０２　１０：２７：５４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２１０　

－－－To adjust bassand treble, select BASS or TREBLE,and press ENTER on the interfaceselector. The current setting isshown on the display. Turn theinterface knob to the desired level,and enter your selection by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

Thesemodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.Fader adjusts the front-to-backstrength, while balance adjusts theside-to-side strength. To adjust faderand balance, select FADER orBALANCE, then press ENTER onthe interface selector. The currentsetting is shown on the screen. Turnthe interface knob to the desiredlevel, and enter your selection bypressing ENTER on the interfaceselector. To equalize the fader orbalance, turn the interface knob untilthe marks on the sound grid come tothe center of the adjustment bar.

Toadjust the strength of the soundfrom the center or subwooferspeaker, select it and press ENTERon the interface selector. Turn theinterface knob to the desired level,and enter your selection by pressingENTER on the interface selector.


BASS/TREBLE FADER/BALANCE CENTER/SUBWOOFER

206

０６／０８／０２　１０：２７：５９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２１１　

－ DolbyPL (ProLogic) II signal processingcreates multi-channel surroundsound from 2 channel stereo audiosources. Dolby ProLogic II can onlyactivate when listening to DISC (CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM radio, andAUX. When ProLogic II is active,‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display.

To set this feature on or off, selectDolby PL II, and press ENTER onthe interface selector. Rotate theinterface dial to ON or OFF, andpress ENTER.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. ‘‘Dolby’’,‘‘ProLogic’’, and the double-D symbolare trademarks of DolbyLaboratories.

The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. The default setting is MID.To change the SVC mode, selectSVC, then press ENTER on theinterface selector. The currentsetting is shown on the screen. Turnthe interface knob to desired level,and enter your selection by pressingENTER on the interface selector. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

ProLogic ON/OFF settings areindependently controlled for DISC,XM and AUX sources.


Dolby PL (ProLogic) II Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)

Features

207

０６／０８／０２　１０：２８：０５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２１２　

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)

208

SCANBUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

AUDIO DISPLAY

AUDIOBUTTON

PRESETBUTTONS

TUNE KNOB

AUDIO DISPLAY

SCANBUTTON

AUDIOBUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

XMBUTTON

DISPLAY/MODEBUTTON

TUNE KNOB

DISPLAY/MODEBUTTON

XMBUTTON

CATEGORY BUTTONS

CATEGORYBUTTONS

Without rear entertainment system With rear entertainment system

INTERFACE DIAL

０６／１１／０８　１０：０２：２９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２１３　

To listen to XM Satellite Radio, turnthe ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Push the power/volumeknob to turn on the audio system,and press the button. Thelast channel you listened to will showin the display. Adjust the volume byturning the power/volume knob.

Push the AUDIO button to displayXM in formation on the screen. Youcan operate XM Satellite Radiosystem with the interface selector.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States, and Canada, exceptHawaii and Alaska. XM is aregistered trade mark of XMSatellite Radio, Inc.

XM Satellite Radio receives signalsfrom two satellites to produce clear,high-quality digital reception. Itoffers many channels in severalcategories. Along with a largeselection of different types of music,XM Satellite Radio also allows you toview channel and category selectionsin the audio display.

CONTINUED


Operating the XM Radio

Features

209

０６／０８／０２　１０：２８：２２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２１４　

－－In the category mode, such as Jazz,Rock, Classical, etc., you cannavigate through all of the channelswithin that category. In the channelmode, you can select all of theavailable channels.

Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the audiodisplay changes in the followingsequence: channel name, channelnumber, category, artist name, andmusic title.

On the screen, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

To switch between thecategory mode and channel mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes. TheCATEGORY or CHANNEL mode isdisplayed on the screen. To switchthe mode with the interface dial,scroll down, select MODE, and pressENTER on the selector.

Turn the TUNE knob tochange channel selections. Turn theknob right for higher numberedchannels and left for lowernumbered channels. You can alsochange channels with the interfaceselector, push down the interfaceselector to choose TUNE and pressENTER on the selector. Turn theinterface knob to the same directions.In the category mode, you can onlyselect channels within that category.


MODE TUNE

210

０６／０８／０２　１０：２８：２８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２１５　

－＋－－

CONTINUED

Presseither button to select anothercategory. You can also change bypushing the interface selector left orright.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activateSCAN, press the SCAN button. Toscan with the interface dial, scrolldown, and push interface selector tothe right. You will see SCAN on thescreen and audio display.

The system plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, push theinterface selector to the right againor press the SCAN button to cancel.


CATEGORY ( or ) SCAN

Features

211

０６／０８／０２　１０：２８：３３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２１６　

－ You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can beselected. In channel mode, allchannels can be selected.

Use the TUNE or SCAN functionto tune to a desired channel.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe PRESET button until you heara beep. You can also pick thenumber with the interface dial.Select your desired number andpress and hold ENTER on theinterface selector.

Press the button or scrollup again. The other XM band willbe shown. Store the next sixchannels using steps 2 and 3.

Once a channel is stored, pressand release the proper presetbutton to tune to it.

Press the button or scrollup by pushing the interfaceselector up. Either XM1 or XM2will be shown on the display.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.


Preset

212

XM BAND

０６／０８／０２　１０：２８：４２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２１７　

－

－

－

－－

－

XM is loading theaudio or programinformation.

The channelcurrently selected isno longerbroadcasting.

The signal iscurrently tooweak. Move thevehicle to an areaaway from tallbuildings, andwith anunobstructed viewof the southernhorizon.

The encryptioncode is beingupdated. Waituntil theencryption code isfully updated.Channels 0 and 1should still worknormally.

The selected channelnumber does not exist oris not part of yoursubscription, or thischannel has no artist ortitle information at thistime.

There is a problemwith the XMantenna. Pleaseconsult your dealer.

CONTINUED

XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘UPDATING’’ ‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’


Features

213

０６／０８／０２　１０：２８：４９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２１８　

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator.


214

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

０６／０８／０２　１０：２８：５３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２１９　

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect satelliteradio reception.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get your

radio I.D. number, turn the TUNEknob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position, push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system, and press the

button. A variety of musictypes and styles will play.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, ‘‘category’’or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,and you’ll be able to listen to XMRadio broadcasts. XM Radio willcontinue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hoursfrom the activation request. If theservice has not been activated after36 hours, contact XM Radio.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSatellite Radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.


www.xmradio.com

CONTINUED

Receiving XM Satellite RadioService


Features

215

０６／０８／０２　１０：２９：０５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２２０　

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)

216

SCANBUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

AUDIO DISPLAY

PRESETBUTTONS

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

DISPLAY/MODEBUTTON

LOADBUTTON

LOADBUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

FOLDERKNOB

SEEK BUTTONS

RANDOM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

DISC BUTTON FOLDERKNOB

INTERFACE DIAL

SCANBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

DISC BUTTON

Without rear entertainment system With rear entertainment system

AUDIO BUTTON

DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON

AUDIO DISPLAY

RANDOMBUTTONSEEKBUTTONS

AUDIOBUTTON

０６／１１／０８　１０：０２：４０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２２１　

Your vehicle’s audio system has anin-dash disc changer with the samecontrols used for the radio. Tooperate the disc changer, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position.

The disc changer can play these discformats:

DVD-A discs not meeting DVDverification standards may not beplayable.

Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixeddiscs are not playable.

‘‘DTS’’ and ‘‘DTS Digital Surround’’are registered trademarks of DigitalTheater Systems, Inc.

The changer can also play MP3 orWMA format (see page ).

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

The disc packages or jackets shouldhave one of these marks.

CD (CD-DA)CD-R/RWDVD-ADVD-R/RWMP3/WMA

The changer cannot play DVD-Vformat.

222


Features

217


０６／１１／０８　１０：０２：５１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２２２　

To load multiple discs in oneoperation:

Insert a disc into the slot. Insert itonly about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way. Youwill see the ‘‘BUSY’’ in audiodisplay. When you insert the firstdisc, the changer will start to playthe disc.

When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in theaudio display again, insert the nextdisc into the slot.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. If you are not loadingall six positions, the system will

then begin playing the last discloaded.

If you stop loading discs before allsix positions are filled, the systemwill wait for 10 seconds, stop the loadoperation, and begin playing the lastdisc loaded.

To load a single disc:

With the ignition in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position, press and hold the LOADbutton until you hear a beep andsee ‘‘LOAD’’ in the upper display,then release the button.

Press and release the LOADbutton.

‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screenfor an empty position in thechanger. When the green loadindicator comes on and you seethe ‘‘LOAD’’ in the audio display,insert the disc into the slot. Insertit only about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way.

You can select the position to load adisc. Turn the interface knob orpress a preset button to select theposition, then press ENTER on theselector. This starts the loadingsequence. If you do not select theposition, the system loads the disc tothe first empty position in numericalorder.

If you press the LOAD button whilea disc is playing, the system will stopplaying that disc and start theloading sequence. It will then playthe disc just loaded.

1.

1.2.

3.

4.

2.


Loading Discs in the Changer

218

０６／０８／０２　１０：２９：３８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２２３　

＋

－

－

－＋

Select the changer by pressing theDISC button. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in thedisc changer. You will see thecurrent disc position highlighted.

When you play CD-TEXT, you willsee the track name, artist name, andalbum name on the screen. Whenyou play MP3/WMA discs, you willsee the track name and folder nameon the screen. If the disc was notrecorded with this information, it willnot be displayed.

Each time you press the DISP button,the audio display changes fromalbum name, to track name, to artistname, and then to normal displaythat shows the track number and thecurrent time. When playing a disc inMP3/WMA, the display modechanges from folder name, to filename, to artist tag, to album tag, totrack tag, and then to normal display.

To select a different disc, press thecorresponding number on the presetbuttons, or turn the interface knob tohighlight the desired disc, then pressENTER on the interface selector.

The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3,and WMA formats.

If the disc does not carry album,track, or artist name, pressing theDISP button changes the displayfrom normal display to ‘‘NO INFO’’.

Each time you press and release theSEEK ( ) button or push theinterface selector to the right, theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the SEEK ( ) button orpush the interface selector to the leftto skip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press the SEEK( ) button or push the interfaceselector to the left again to skip tothe previous track. To move rapidlywithin a track, press and hold theSEEK ( ) or SEEK ( ) button.


To Play a Disc

To Change Tracks

Features

219

CURRENT DISC

０６／０８／０２　１０：２９：４６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２２４　

You can also choose a track directlyfrom a track list. Press ENTER onthe interface selector, and the tracklist screen will be shown. If there areno track names, track numbers aredisplayed. You will see the currenttrack is highlighted. Turn theinterface knob to select the desiredtrack, then press ENTER on theinterface selector.

To exit the track list display, pressthe AUDIO button, or push theinterface selector to the left.

When you press the SCAN button orscroll down and push the interfaceselector to the left, the next track ofthe current track plays for about 10seconds. You will see SCAN next toTRACK on the screen and audiodisplay. To listen to the rest of thetrack, press and hold the SCANbutton until you hear a beep or pushthe interface selector to the leftagain within 10 seconds.

When you press the SCAN buttonrepeatedly until you see D-SCAN inthe audio display, or push down theinterface selector to the right, thefirst track of the current disc playsfor about 10 seconds. You will seeSCAN next to DISC on the screenand D-SCAN in the audio display. Tolisten to the rest of the disc, pressand hold the SCAN button until youhear a beep, or push down theinterface selector to the right againwithin 10 seconds.

If you don’t, the system advances tothe next disc, plays about 10 secondsof it, and continues through the restof the discs the same way. When thesystem reaches the last disc, DISCSCAN is canceled, and the disc playsnormally.

If you don’t, the system advances tothe next track, plays about 10seconds of it, and continues throughthe rest of the tracks the same way.


To Choose a Track

Track Scan

Disc Scan

220

CURRENT TRACK

０６／０８／０２　１０：２９：５５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２２５　

To replay the current trackcontinuously, press and release theRPT button, or use the interfaceselector to scroll down, selectTRACK REPEAT, and press ENTERon the interface selector. As areminder, you will see REPEAT nextto TRACK on the screen and RPT inthe audio display. To turn thisfeature off, press and hold the RPTbutton until you hear a beep, orhighlight TRACK REPEAT (if notalready highlighted), and pressENTER on the interface selectoragain.

To replay the current disccontinuously, press the RPT buttonrepeatedly until you see D-RPT inthe audio display, or use theinterface selector to scroll down,select DISC REPEAT, and pressENTER on the interface selector. Asa reminder, you will see REPEATnext to DISC on the screen andD-RPT in the audio display. To turnthis feature off, press and hold theRPT button until you hear a beep, orhighlight DISC REPEAT (if notalready highlighted), and pressENTER on the interface selectoragain.

To play the tracks of the current discin random order, press and releasethe RDM button, or use the interfaceselector to scroll down, selectTRACK RANDOM, and pressENTER on the interface selector. Asa reminder, you will see RANDOMnext to TRACK on the screen andRDM in the audio display. To turnthis feature off, press and hold theRDM button until you hear a beep,or highlight TRACK RANDOM (ifnot already highlighted), and pressENTER on the interface selectoragain.


Track Repeat Disc Repeat Random Play

Features

221

０６／０８／０２　１０：３０：０１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２２６　

Use the disc controls previouslydescribed.

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:To pause a disc, press the preset

button which corresponds to thecurrent disc. To play the disc again,press the preset button again.

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz(MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

Sampling frequency: 22.051/32/44.1/48 kHz

To play an MP3/WMA disc, use thedisc controls previously described,along with the following information.

Compatible with variable bit rate andmulti-session

Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192kbps

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or the ignitionswitch, play will continue at the samepoint when you turn it back on.

Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbpsCompatible with variable bit rate andmulti-session

The changer plays MP3/WMA filesin recorded order. Each disc canhold up to 400 playable files within 8folder layers. When playing MP3discs, a disc can support a maximumnumber of 100 folders, and eachfolder can hold 255 playable files.

To take the system out of disc mode,press the AM/FM button the

button, or the AUX button.To return to disc mode, press theDISC button.

Playing a DVD-A DiscTo Pause a Disc

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc

To Stop Playing a Disc


222

０６／０８／０２　１０：３０：１３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２２７　

While playing an MP3/WMA disc,you can select a folder within thedisc by turning the TUNE knob.Each time you rotate the knob, thefolder title and its first file’sinformation appear in the audiodisplay in recorded order.

If you use the interface selector, youcan see the list of all the files andfolders within a disc. While playing aMP3/WMA disc, press the AUDIObutton. The currently playing folderand file information comes on thescreen. Turn the selector knob,highlight the folder you want to seethe information within, and pressENTER.

Repeat the procedure to go into alower folder. If you highlight a fileand press ENTER, the system startsto play your selected file.

Changing and Selecting the Folders/Files


Changing the Folders

Features

223

０６／０８／０２　１０：３０：２０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２２８　

This feature, when activated,samples the first file of each folderfor 10 seconds. To scan a folder,press the SCAN button repeatedlyuntil you see F-SCAN in the audiodisplay. You will see SCAN next toFOLDER and F-SCAN in the audiodisplay.

To listen to the rest of the folder,press and hold the SCAN buttonuntil you hear a beep. If you do not,the system advances to the nextfolder, plays 10 seconds of it, andcontinues throughout the rest of thefolder same way. When the systemsamples the first file of all folders,folder scan is canceled, and the lastfile played comes back.

This feature, when activated, replaysall files on the selected folder. Toactivate folder repeat mode, pressand hold the RPT button repeatedlyuntil you see F-RPT in the audiodisplay, or use the interface selectorto scroll down, select FOLDERREPEAT by interface knob, andpress ENTER on the interfaceselector. You will see REPEAT nextto FOLDER on the screen andF-RPT in the audio display. To turnthis feature off, press and hold thePRT button until you hear a beep, orhighlight FOLDER REPEAT (if notalready highlighted), and pressENTER on the interface selectoragain.

This feature, when activated, plays inthe current folder in random order.To activate folder random play, pressthe RDM button twice, or use theinterface selector to scroll down,select FOLDER RANDOM byinterface knob, and press ENTER onthe interface selector. You will seeRANDOM next to FOLDER on thescreen and F-RDM in the audiodisplay. To turn this feature off,press and hold the RDM button untilyou hear a beep, or highlightFOLDER RANDOM (if not alreadyhighlighted), and press ENTER onthe interface selector again.

Folder Scan Folder RandomFolder Repeat


224

０６／０８／０２　１０：３０：２７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２２９　

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it by pressingthe corresponding number on thepreset button or turning theinterface knob, and pressing ENTERon the interface selector. When thatdisc begins playing, press the ejectbutton.

When you press the eject buttonwhile listening to the radio, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the discs from the changer.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the audio display.When you remove the disc from theslot, the system automatically entersthe previous mode AM, FM1, FM2,or XM Satellite Radio. The systemalso begins the load sequence so youcan load another disc. If you do notload another disc, the load sequenceis canceled, and the systemcontinues playing in the previousmode.

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 10 seconds. To beginplaying the disc, press the discbutton.

To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off:To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.

Removing Discs from theChanger


Features

225

０６／０８／０２　１０：３０：３３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２３０　

－

－

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to your dealer.



The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

Error Message Cause Solution

High Temperature

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will skipped. The next supportedtrack or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt.Insert the disc again. If the code does notdisappear, or the disc(s) cannot be removed,consult your dealer. Do not try to force the discout of the player.

Disc Changer Error Messages

226

HEAT ERROR

FORMAT

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNER’SMANUAL PUSH

EJECTBAD DISC

PLEASE CHECKOWNER’SMANUAL

０６／０８／０２　１０：３０：４０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２３１　

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labeledfor audio use.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by the discchanger.

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc changer.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

Play only standard, round, 5-inch(12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd-shaped discs may jam in the driveor cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

Features

227


０６／０８／０２　１０：３０：４９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２３２　

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press the AUXbutton to select it.

The auxiliary input jack is inside thefront console compartment. Thesystem will accept auxiliary inputfrom standard audio accessories.

All models except U.S. EntertainmentPackage and Canadian Elite Package

Auxiliary Input Jack

228

０６／０８／０２　１０：３０：５３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２３３　

▲ ▼

＋－

＋

－

＋－

＋－

＋

－

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the upper display.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,DISC (if a disc is loaded), DVD video(if equipped), XM1, XM2, or AUX.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

To search up and down from thecurrent frequency and find a stationwith a strong signal, press the top( ) or bottom ( ) of the button for1 second.

To go to the next disc, press the top( ) of the button. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previous disc.When you play an MP3/WMA disc,press the top ( ) of the button for 1second to go to the next folder. Pressthe bottom ( ) for 1 second to goback to the previous folder.

CONTINUED

Remote Audio Controls


Features

229

MODEBUTTON

CHBUTTON

VOL BUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：３１：０１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２３４　

＋

－

＋－

＋

－

If you are listening to XM SatelliteRadio, use the CH button to changechannels. Each time you press thetop ( ) of the button, the systemgoes to the next preset channel.Press the bottom ( ) to go back tothe previous preset channel.To go to the next channel of thecategory you are listening to, pressthe top ( ) of the button for 1second. Press the bottom ( ) for 1second to go back to the previouschannel.

If you are playing a DVD video, usethe channel button to changechapters. Each time you press thetop ( ) of the button, the systemgoes to the next chapter. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current chapter.Press it again to return to theprevious chapter.


230

０６／０８／０２　１０：３１：０５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２３５　

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code withthe preset buttons. Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from the fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from your dealer.To do this, you will need the audiosystem’s serial number.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have 10 tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in 10 attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, or the radiofuse is removed, the audio systemwill disable itself. If this happens,you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the audiodisplay the next time you turn on thesystem. Use the preset buttons toenter the five-digit code. The code islocated on the radio code cardincluded in your owner’s manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.

The system will retain your AM andFM presets even if power isdisconnected.

Radio Theft Protection

Features

231

０６／０８／０２　１０：３１：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２３６　

▼ ▲

Press and release the SET buttonrepeatedly. The mode switchesfrom hours, minutes, AM/PM,year, month, then to day as shownabove.

Select the desired mode bypressing the SET button, thenpress either or button tochange the setting.

After you set the day information,pressing the SET button again willcancel this setting mode and thesystem shows the adjusted display.

The system will also automaticallyreturn to the normal display about 10seconds after you stop adjusting amode.

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

You can see the clock and calendarinformation on the upper display.

Press and hold the SET buttonuntil the clock display begins toblink.

To set the clock and the calendar:1.

2.

3.

4.

On models with navigation system

On models without navigation system

Setting the Clock and Calendar

232

: Press SETU.S. model is shown

０６／０８／０２　１０：３１：２１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２３７　

Press the REAR PWR button. Theindicator on the REAR PWR buttonwill come on, as well as the indicatoron the FRONT SOURCE button.The rear seat passengers can thenoperate the rear system from thecontrol panel in the ceiling. The rearcontrol panel can also be detachedand used as a remote control, bypushing the RELEASE button, andpulling the remote toward you.

When you turn on the system, therear speakers are automaticallyturned off if the rear system selectsa different entertainment sourcethan the front system. You will seethe Rear Speakers Off icon both inthe audio display and the overheadscreen. The sound for the rearsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position to operate the rearentertainment system.

With this system, the rearpassengers can enjoy a differententertainment source (radio, discchanger, DVD player, XM Radio, oroptional CD changer/tape player)than the front seat occupants. Theaudio is broadcast through thesupplied wireless headphones.

Your vehicle is equipped with a rearentertainment system that includes aDVD player for the enjoyment of therear passengers.

Pressing the REAR CTRL OFFbutton disables rear control. Theindicator in the button comes on andyour passengers can no longeroperate the system with the rearcontrol panel. When the button ispressed, the ‘‘CTRL OFF’’ messageappears in the overhead screen to letyour passengers know that thecontrol panel is disabled.The rear system selects the source itwas last set to. If that source hasbeen removed (the DVD has beenejected from the player, for example),

you will see ‘‘DVD EJECT’’ in thedisplay. You should select anothersource or insert a DVD.

If you want to turn the rear speakerson again, press and hold the REARPWR button until the Rear SpeakersOff icon goes off.

The rear speakers areconnected to the front system, sothey will always play the source thatthe front system is set to.

CONTINUED

Available on U.S. EntertainmentPackage and Canadian Elite Packagemodels

To Turn On the System

Rear Speakers

Rear Entertainment System

Features

233

NOTE:

０６／０８／０２　１０：３１：３０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２３８　


U.S. Entertainment Package andCanadian Elite Package models

234

REAR PWR BUTTON Overhead Screen UnitREAR CTRL OFF BUTTON

FRONT SOURCE BUTTON REAR SOURCE BUTTON

０６／１１／０８　１０：０２：５６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２３９　

Open the overhead screen bypushing the OPEN button. Thescreen will swing down part-way.Pivot the screen the rest of the way.If you pivot the screen too farforward, past the second detent, thedisplay will turn off. Pivot the screenback to the second or first detent toturn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

To operate the rear entertainmentsystem from the front panel, pressthe REAR SOURCE button. You willhear two beeps and the indicator inthe button comes on to show that thecontrol panel is enabled.

The DVD player in your rearentertainment system can play DVDvideo discs, audio CDs MP3/WMAdiscs and DTS CDs.

If you do not operate the rearentertainment system from the frontpanel within 10 seconds, theindicator goes off and the FRONTSOURCE indicator comes onautomatically.

To play the radio, the buttons for thefront entertainment system have thesame functions.

If discs are loaded in the discchanger of the upper part, select the6 DISC button. If a disc is loaded inthe lower player, select the DVDbutton.

CONTINUED

To Select Rear Entertainmentfrom the Front Control Panel

Operating the DVD Player fromthe Front Control Panel


Features

235

REAR CONTROL PANEL

OPEN BUTTON

OVERHEAD SCREEN

０６／０８／０２　１０：３１：４２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２４０　

－

－

Insert a DVD into the lower DVD/CD slot in the audio unit.

Push the DVD in halfway, the drivewill pull it in the rest of the way.

Press the DVD ( )button if the DVD does not startplaying automatically.

Press the DVD ( )button to pause the DVD. Press thebutton again or press PLAY toresume. Pause works only with theDVD player.


PLAY

PAUSE

U.S. Entertainment Package andCanadian Elite Package models

236

EJECT BUTTON

PLAY/PAUSE BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS

０６／１１／０８　１０：０３：０３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２４１　

－－＋

－

＋

－

Press the eject button toremove the DVD from the drive.

Press and hold thebutton to move forward; you will

see the time elapsed shown in theoverhead screen advances rapidly.Press and hold the button to movebackward; you will see the timeelapsed shown in the overheadscreen decreases. Release the buttonwhen the system reaches the pointyou want.

To return front panel control to thefront audio system. Press theFRONT SOURCE button. You willhear a beep and the indicator in thebutton comes on. The indicator alsocomes on automatically, when youdo not operate the rearentertainment system for 10 seconds.

To turn on the rear entertainmentsystem from the rear control panel,press the PWR button. Use the AM/FM button, XM RADIO button, 6DISC button, DVD button, or AUXbutton to select the entertainmentsource. The selected source will beshown in the display. Make sure therear control operation has not beendisabled with the REAR CTRLbutton on the front panel. When theaudio system is off or the front siderear power is off, the rear controlpanel cannot be turned on.

Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack or chapter. Press and releasethe button to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track orchapter.

EJECT

To Return to Front AudioControls

Using the Rear Control PanelSEEK/SKIP


Features

237

０６／０８／０２　１０：３１：５７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２４２　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Use the , , , orbutton to highlight SEEK,

TUNE, AUTO SELECT, SCAN, orone of the preset radio stations onthe overhead screen. You can enterthe highlighted function by pressingthe ENT button. These functionshave the same features as those ofthe front audio system. You can alsouse the or buttons to seekup/down and or to tuneup/down.

You can also use the orbuttons to change categories

up/down and or to changechannels up/down within a category(in CATEGORY mode) or up/downfor all channels (in CH mode).

Use the , , , orbutton to highlight CATE (to

change categories), CHAN (tochange channels), MODE (to

change category or channel mode),SCAN, or one of the preset channelson the overhead screen. You canenter the highlighted function bypressing the ENT button. Thesefunctions have the same features asthose of the front audio system.

To Play the Radio from the RearControl Panel

To Play the XM Radio from theRear Control Panel


238

REAR CONTROL PANEL

０６／０８／０２　１０：３２：０５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２４３　

▲ ▼▲

▲ ▼

▼

While the overhead screen is closed,you can see the XM radioinformation in the subsidiary displayin the ceiling. Pressing the DISPMODE button repeatedly changesthe subsidiary display from thechannel number, to the categoryname, to the music title, to the artistname, and to the channel name, andthen back to the channel number.

If discs are loaded in the discchanger, select them by pressing the6 DISC button.

To change the disc currently playing,use the , , , or

button to highlight yourselected disc icon, and press ENT.

If CDs are loaded in the CD changerand the overhead screen is not open,pressing the or button changesthe discs.

To change mode, press and hold theDISP MODE button for 5 seconds.

Use the , , , orbutton to highlight REPEAT,

RANDOM, SCAN, , (skip),, or (cue) on the overhead

screen. You can enter thehighlighted function by pressing theENT button. These functions havethe same features as those of thefront audio system.


To Play a Disc in the 6-DiscChanger from the Rear ControlPanel

Features

239

０６／０８／０２　１０：３２：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２４４　

The video screen is for use by rearseat passengers only. The driver andfront seat passenger should not tryto view the screen while driving.

Open the overhead screen bypushing the OPEN button. Thescreen will swing down part-way.Pivot the screen the rest of the way.If you pivot the screen too farforward, past the second detent, thedisplay will turn off. Pivot the screenback to the second or first detent toturn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

Press the button when youwant to pause the DVD. Press thisbutton again to go back to PLAY.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next chapter. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current chapter.

Press the button again quicklyto go to the previous chapter.

To move rapidly within a chapter,press and hold the or

button. The system willcontinue to move through thechapter. Press the button tomove forward, or the button tomove backward. Release the buttonwhen the system reaches the pointyou want.

To select the menu on the DVD,press the MENU/SCROLL button.Use the , , , and

buttons to move to the desiredmenu selection, then press the ENTbutton to enter your selection.

To Play a DVD from the RearControl Panel


240

REAR CONTROL PANEL

OPENBUTTON

OVERHEAD SCREEN

０６／０８／０２　１０：３２：２３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２４５　

When you press the DISP buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the currentstatuses of title, chapter, elapsedtime, angle, subtitle, audio, andsound characteristics, with thepersonal surround logo are displayed.To return to the DVD video screen,press the DISP button again.

If you do not press the DISP button,the screen returns to the DVD videoscreen after several seconds.

When you press the MENUSCROLL button while a DVD isplaying, the DVD Menu appears.The menu options are TOP MENU,MENU, PLAY MODE, SEARCH,and NumInput.

To go to your selected menu, use theor button to highlight the

icon and press the ENT button. Toreturn to the DVD video screen,select EXIT.

When you select ‘‘TOP MENU’’, thescreen changes to the DVD’s titlemenu. This menu also appears whenyou press the MENU SCROLLbutton while a DVD is not playing.To go back to play, press theRETURN button.

Top Menu

CONTINUED

DISP Button MENU SCROLL Button


Features

241

０６／０８／０２　１０：３２：３３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２４６　

▲▼

Menu Play Mode

When you select ‘‘MENU’’ with theor button, the screen

changes to the DVD’s title menu.

When you select ‘‘PLAY MODE’’with the or button, youcan change the DVD’s Audio,Subtitle or Angle setting.

To change the Audio setting,highlight ‘‘Audio’’ from the playmode menu with the or

button and press the ENTbutton. A submenu of the dubbedlanguage appears. You can selectanother language by pressing the

or button. The soundcharacteristics (Dolby Digital,LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recordedwith the selected language is alsodisplayed next to the language.

‘‘Audio’’


242

０６／０８／０２　１０：３２：４１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２４７　

▼ ▲

▼▲

▼ ▲

CONTINUED

‘‘Subtitle’’

To change the DVD’s subtitle,highlight ‘‘Subtitle’’ from the playmode menu with the or

button and press the ENTbutton. You can see the availablesubtitles with the or

button. Press the ENT buttonwhen your desired subtitle ishighlighted.

The selectable languages vary fromDVD to DVD, and this feature maynot be available on some DVDs.

Press the RETURN button or cursorback with the or button togo back to the top of the Play Modemenu. Press the RETURN buttonagain to exit completely.

After selecting your desired subtitle,press the RETURN button or cursorback with the or button togo back to the top of the Play Modemenu. Press the RETURN buttonagain to exit completely.


Features

243

０６／０８／０２　１０：３２：４８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２４８　

▼ ▲

▲▼

‘‘Angle’’

When you highlight ‘‘Search’’ withthe or button, the ‘‘Jumpto chapter and title number input’’message appears. To select‘‘Chapter’’ or ‘‘Title’’ search, pressthe ENT button.

SearchIf there are no multiple anglesavailable on the DVD, you cannotchange from ‘‘Angle 1’’.

Press the RETURN button or cursorback with the or button togo back to the top of the Play Modemenu.

Press the RETURN button again toexit completely.

To change the view angle, highlight‘‘Angle’’ from the play mode menuwith the or button andpress the ENT button. You can seethe available angle options with the

or button. Press the ENTbutton when your desired subtitle ishighlighted.


244

０６／０８／０２　１０：３２：５７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２４９　

▲▼

CONTINUED

‘‘Title/Chapter Search’’

When you ‘‘Title’’ highlighted, usethe or button to jump toyour desired title and press the ENTbutton. When ‘‘Chapter’’ ishighlighted, follow the sameprocedure for the chapter search.

A numerical command can be issuedto a DVD by inputting a two digitnumber, and a button number can beselected on the screen.

Select the first digit number usingthe , , , or

button, and enter it by pressingthe ENT button. If you want tochange the number, select ‘‘DEL,’’and press the ENT button, thenselect and enter the new number.

When you highlight, ‘‘NumInput’’with the or button, the‘‘Jump to keypad’’ message appears.Press the ENT button to go to theNumInput selection screen.

NumInput


Features

245

０６／０８／０２　１０：３３：０５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２５０　

▼ ▲

Select and enter the second digitnumber the same way. The cursorwill automatically move to the ‘‘ENT’’icon when you press the ENT button.Press the ENT button to enter thenumber command. To go back to theDVD screen, press the RETURNbutton or select EXIT and press theENT button.

When you press the SETUP buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the setupmenu appears. The menu options areDISP ADUSTMENT, ASPECTRATIO, and PERSONALSURROUND.

To change a setup, use the orbutton to highlight your

selection and press the ENT button.To return to the DVD video screen,select EXIT.

To adjust the display, highlight ‘‘DispAdjust’’ from the setup menu withthe or button and pressthe ENT button. You can adjustthese display settings:

BrightnessContrastBlack LevelTintColor

Disp Adjust


SETUP Button

246

０６／０８／０２　１０：３３：１３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２５１　

▼ ▲▲▼

CONTINUED

Select the quality you want to adjustby pressing the or button.Adjust the setting by pressing the

or button. When you arefinished with your adjustment,cursor back to the top of the setupmenu, or press the RETURN buttonto exit.

If you want to set the display to thedefault setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ bypressing the or button, and,then pressing the ENT button.

The display changes as shown above.

Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENTbutton. You will see the message‘‘Default display settings applied’’ onthe display for 5 seconds.


Features

247

０６／０８／０２　１０：３３：２１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２５２　

Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressingthe or button, then pressthe ENT button.

The selected setting will behighlighted in blue for one second,and the screen returns to the playmode in the selected setting.

The selectable setting menu isdisplayed, and the current setting ishighlighted in blue.

You can set the screen mode tothese settings:

NormalWideZoomFull

Select the desired setting bypressing the or button,then press the ENT button.

Aspect Ratio


248

０６／０８／０２　１０：３３：２７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２５３　

▲▼

CONTINUED

To change the Personal Surroundsetting, highlight ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ from the setup menuwith the or button andpress the ENT button. The effectselection appears.

If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logodisappears, and there will be nospecial sound effect.

Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’by pressing the or button,and enter your selection by pressingthe ENT button. The ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ logo is displayed inthe upper right corner of the screen.

Personal Surround


Features

249

０６／０８／０２　１０：３３：３３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２５４　

▼ ▲

When you press the SETUP buttonon the rear control panel when aDVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIALSETTINGS’’ menu is displayed.

When you select ‘‘Language’’ withthe or button, the menushown above appears.

There are two selectable menus:‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’

Menu Language

To return to the stop or prestopscreen, select ‘‘Exit’’ using the

or button, and then pressthe ENT, or the SETUP button.

To select the language used in theDISC menus, select ‘‘MenuLanguage’’ by pressing the orbutton.

INITIAL SETTINGS Menu INITIAL SETTINGS (Language)


250

０６／０８／０２　１０：３３：４２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２５５　

If you want another language thanthose listed, you need to enter thecode number of the desired language.Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENTbutton. The display changes asshown in the next column.

If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press theENT button, the display returns tothe initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’menu.

The selectable languages are,English, French, Spanish, German,Italian, Dutch, Chinese, Korean, Thai,Japanese or others.

Select the desired language bypressing the or button,and then pressing the ENT button.

CONTINUED


Features

251

０６／０８／０２　１０：３３：５０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２５６　

▼ ▲

Audio Language

If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the displaychanges to the language code inputmode. Select the first number digitusing the , , , or

button, and press the ENTbutton to enter it. Repeat this until allfour digits are filled. When thefourth digit is entered, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel to enter the newlanguage code.

If you made a mistake entering anumber digit, select ‘‘DEL’’ on thedisplay with the , , ,or button, and press the ENTbutton on the control panel. Thenselect and enter the correct numberdigit as described. The displayreturns to the initial ‘‘Language’’menu screen.

You can select the dubbed languagebefore playing DVDs.Select ‘‘Audio Lang’’ by pressing the

or button. You will see thesubmenu next to ‘‘Audio Lang.’’

Follow the same instructions youused to set the menu language.


252

０６／０８／０２　１０：３３：５９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２５７　

▼ ▲

Subtitle Language

You can select the subtitle languagebefore playing DVDs.Select ‘‘Subtitle Lang’’ by pressingthe or button. You will see thesubmenu next to the ‘‘Subtitle Lang.’’

Dynamic Range

Follow the same instructions youused to set the menu language.

‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces thedifferences between the loud andquiet sound levels throughout thedisc. When this is on, the loudersounds are lowered, and quietersounds are increased.

When you select ‘‘Others’’ at the topof the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’ screen,the above menu appears on thescreen.

CONTINUED

INITIAL SETTINGS (Others)


Features

253

０６／０８／０２　１０：３４：０７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２５８　

▼ ▲ ▼ ▲When you select the ‘‘DynamicRange’’ by pressing the orbutton, you will see the submenunext to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ asshown above.

Angle Mark

When you switch to another anglewhile playing a DVD, the angle markis displayed in the upper right cornerof the screen.

You can set the system to display ornot display this angle mark.To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,

select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressingthe or button.

Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing theor button. The above submenu

appears. If you want the angle markto be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the

or button.


254

ANGLE MARK

０６／０８／０２　１０：３４：１５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２５９　

When you select and enter ‘‘Yes,’’the display changes as shown above.To change the level, you need toenter your four digit password.Select the number for the first digitby pressing the , , , or

button, and enter it by pressingthe ENT button. Repeat this until allfour digits are filled. When you enterthe fourth number, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel.

You can place an auditory restrictionby changing the parental controllevel. The higher the level number,the lower the restriction.

Highlight ‘‘Parental Level’’ and pressENT button. You will see thesubmenu. If you select ‘‘No’’ andpress the ENT button, the screengoes back to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.

Parental Level

CONTINUED


Features

255

０６／０８／０２　１０：３４：２３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２６０　

If the system does not recognize thepassword you entered, you will seethe above display. Repeat theparental control level steps until youenter the correct password.

If you enter the password correctly,you can then change the parentalcontrol level.

The password was set to ‘‘1111’’when the vehicle left the factory.

Once you correctly enter thepassword, press the or

button to change the level, andthen press the ENT button to enteryour selection.

Changing the Password


256

０６／０８／０２　１０：３４：２９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２６１　

To change the password, select‘‘Password.’’ You will see the abovemenu displayed. Select ‘‘Yes’’ bypressing the or button,then press the ENT button.

If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press theENT button, the display returns tothe ‘‘Others’’ menu.

Select the first digit by pressing the, , , or button,

and enter it by pressing the ENTbutton. Repeat this until all fourdigits are entered. When you enterthe fourth number, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel.

If the system does not recognize thepassword you entered, you will seethe above display. Repeat thepassword setting steps until youenter the correct password.

CONTINUED


Features

257

０６／０８／０２　１０：３４：３８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２６２　

▲If you forget the password, select‘‘Password,’’ and press the button10 times.

The display changes as shown above.If you want to use the defaultpassword (1111), select ‘‘Yes,’’ andpress the ENT button.

The message ‘‘Default passwordsetting applied’’ is displayed for5 seconds.

The rear control panel can bedetached from the ceiling unit andused as a remote control. To removeit from the ceiling unit, press therelease button. The control panel willswing down partway. Pivot it downfurther past the detent until itdetaches from the hinge. To reinstallit, reverse the procedure.


Remote Control

258

RELEASE BUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：３４：４５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２６３　

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to operate the rearentertainment system, have yourdealer replace the batteries as soonas possible.

Battery type: BR3032

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulations forbattery disposal.


Replacing the Remote ControlBatteries

Features

259

COVER

０６／０８／０２　１０：３４：５０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２６４　

There are various types of DVDsavailable. Some of them are notcompatible with your system.

The DVD player in your rearentertainment system can playDVDs and CDs bearing the abovemarks on their packages or jackets.

The tips on how to handle andprotect DVDs are basically the sameas those for compact discs. Refer to‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page .Those packages or jackets should

also bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be playedin this system.

The DVD player can also play discsrecorded in MP3/WMA formats andDTS CDs.

This product incorporates copyrightprotection technology that isprotected by U.S. patents and otherintellectual property rights.

Use of this copyright protectiontechnology must be authorized byMacrovision, and is intended forhome and other limited viewing usesonly unless otherwise authorized byMacrovision.

Reverse engineering or disassemblyis prohibited.

227

Playable DVDs Protecting DVDs


260

０６／０８／０２　１０：３４：５９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２６５　



The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

Error Massage Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

Invalid region code

Invalid parentalcontrol level

Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.Check for an error indication. Insert the discagain. If the code does not disappear or the disccannot be removed, consoult your dealer.Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.Check for an error indication. Insert the discagain. If the code does not disappear or the disccannot be removed, consoult your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject thedisc, and insert a disc compatible with thissystem.Reinsert the disc, and increase the parentalcontrol level (see page 255 )


DVD Player Error Messages

Features

261

DISC ERROR

MECH ERROR

HEAT ERROR

REGION ERR

PARENT ERR

０６／０８／０２　１０：３５：０６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２６６　

Some state and local governmentagencies prohibit the use ofheadphones by the driver of a motorvehicle. Always obey applicable lawsand regulations.

To use the headphones, pivot theearpieces outward. This turns themon. To adjust the volume, turn thedial on the bottom of the rightearpiece. When you remove theheadphones, the earpiecesautomatically pivot inward, and theheadphones turn off. When not inuse, store the headphones in thepocket of either front seat.

The audio for the rear entertainmentsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones that come with thesystem. When using the headphones,make sure you wear them correctly:L (left) and R (right) are marked onthe sides of the frame. The antennasare in the front of the earpieces. Ifyou wear the headphones backwards,the antennas will be aimed awayfrom the system, affecting the soundquality and range.

Wireless Headphones


262

VOLUME DIAL

０６／０８／０２　１０：３５：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２６７　

CONTINUED

Auxiliary input jacks and headphoneconnectors for the rearentertainment system are on theback of the center consolecompartment.

Remove the battery. Install the newbattery in the earpiece as shown inthe diagram next to the battery slot.Slide the cover back into place on theearpiece, then press down on theback edge to lock it in place.

Each headphone uses one AAAbattery. The battery is under thecover on the left earpiece. Toremove the cover, insert a coin in theslot and twist it slightly to pry thecover away from the earpiece. Pullthe cover outward, and pivot it out ofthe way.


Replacing Batteries Auxiliary Input Jacks

Features

263

COVER

BATTERYTAB

０６／０８／０２　１０：３５：２０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２６８　

There are three headphoneconnectors for the third seatpassengers. Each connector has itsown volume control.

The system will accept auxiliaryinputs from standard video gamesand video equipment.Some video game power suppliesmay cause poor picture quality.

V = Video jackL = Left audio jackR = Right audio jack


264

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

VOLUME DIALS

HEADPHONE CONNECTORS

０６／０８／０２　１０：３５：２６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２６９　

Once the security system is set,opening any door, the tailgate, or thehood without using the key or theremote transmitter, will cause it toalarm. It also alarms if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, tailgate, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check that the doors, the tailgate andthe hood are fully closed.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, and taillights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for 2 minutes, thenit stops. To reset an alarming systembefore the 2 minutes have elapsed,unlock the driver’s door with the keyor the remote transmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and the tailgate. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors and the tailgate from theoutside with the key, the lock tab,the door lock switch, or the remotetransmitter. The security systemindicator in the instrument panelstarts blinking immediately to showyou the system is setting itself.

Security System

Features

265

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０６／０８／０２　１０：３５：３１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２７０　

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Push in the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

1.

2.

3.Using Cruise Control

Cruise Control

266

CRUISE BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０６／０８／０２　１０：３５：３８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２７１　

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, the vehicle speeds up about 1mph (1.6 km/h).

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your vehicle speedincreases going down a hill, use thebrakes to slow down. This will cancelthe cruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

CONTINUED

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

Features

267

０６／０８／０２　１０：３５：４６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２７２　

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalcauses cruise control to cancel.

Even with cruise control on, you canstill use the accelerator pedal tospeed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

When you push the CANCEL buttonor tap the brake pedal, the systemremembers the previously set speed.To return to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatorcomes on. The vehicle accelerates tothe same speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system completely off and erasesthe previous cruising speed.

Cancelling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise Control

268

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：３５：５４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２７３　

－－▼

－－

▼

CONTINUED

Press and hold the SET button forfive seconds until the Clockdisplay changes to ‘‘ZON? N.’’(Please note that clock adjustmentmode will be started after the firsttwo seconds.)The compass may need to be

manually calibrated after exposure toa strong magnetic field. If thecompass seems to be continuallyshowing the wrong direction and isnot self-calibrating, do the following.

If you see ‘‘ ’’ in the compassdisplay and ‘‘CAL’’ and ‘‘ ’’ areshown in the calendar display, thecompass is self-calibrating.

Compass operation can be affectedby driving near power lines orstations, across bridges, throughtunnels, over railroad crossings, pastlarge vehicles, or driving near largeobjects that can cause a magneticdisturbance. It can also be affectedby accessories such as antennas androof racks that are mounted bymagnets.

Press the SET button. ‘‘CAL? N’’will be displayed. At this point,pressing SET button will existcalibration mode.

Press the button. ‘‘CAL? Y’’ wiilbe displayed.

Press the SET button. Thecompass display will change to‘‘ ’’ and ‘‘CAL’’ and ‘‘ ’’ areshown.

Drive the vehicle slowly in twocomplete circles.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Canadian MDX model

Compass

Compass Calibration

Compass Operation

Features

269

COMPASS DISPLAY

Press andhold SET

Press SET

Press

０６／０８／０２　１０：３６：０６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２７４　

－－

▼

▼▲

Press and hold the SET button forfive seconds until the Clockdisplay changes to ‘‘ZON? N.’’(Please note that clock adjustmentmode will be started after the firsttwo seconds.)

When the display goes from‘‘ ’’ to an actual heading, theunit is calibrated and the displayreturns to normal.

Do this procedure in an openarea, away from buildings, powerlines, and other vehicles.

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone, do this:

Press the button. ‘‘ZOY? Y’’ willbe displayed.

Find the zone for your area on themap.

If the zone is incorrect, press thebutton to cycle the count down,

or the button to cycle the countup. Once the correct zone isdisplayed, continue to step 6.

Press the SET button to set thezone selection.

Press and hold the SET button forabout 5 seconds to exit the zoneselection and return display tonormal.

Press the SET button. The zonethe compass is currently in will bedisplayed.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

6.

7.

Compass

Compass Zone Selection

270

NOTE:

０６／０８／０２　１０：３６：１６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２７５　

Compass

Features

271

Zone Map

０６／０８／０２　１０：３６：１９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２７６　

The HomeLink universaltransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remotely controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected. If your garage dooropener was manufactured beforeApril 1982, you may not be able toprogram HomeLink to operate it.They do not have the safety featurethat causes the motor to stop and

reverse if an obstacle is detectedduring closing, increasing the risk ofinjury.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

For quick and accurate training,make sure the remote transmitterfor the device (garage door,automatic gate, security system, etc.)has a fresh battery.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the electrical outlet.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote 1 to 3 feet fromHomeLink. Make sure you are notblocking your view of the redindicator in HomeLink.

1.

2.

Training HomeLink

General Information


HomeLink Universal Transceiver

272

０６／０８／０２　１０：３６：２７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２７７　

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it for about 1

second.If the button works,programming is complete.If the button does not work goto step 6.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot flash rapidly), your remotetransmitter may stoptransmitting after a short time.Go to step 4.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime. While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, press andrelease the remote transmitterbutton every 2 seconds.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot begin to flash rapidly),repeat steps 2 thru 4.

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other compatibleremotely controlled devicesaround your home (lighting,automatic gate, security system,etc.).

If the indicator flashes rapidlyfor 2 seconds then stays on, youhave a rolling code transmitter:go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).

If the indicator stays on orflashes slowly, repeat steps 2thru 5.

Push and hold the HomeLinkbutton for a few seconds, thenwatch the red indicator onHomeLink.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

274


Features

273

RED INDICATOR

０６／０８／０２　１０：３６：３８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２７８　

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener is needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

Find the ‘‘training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press the HomeLink button againfor about 1 second. It shouldoperate the garage door.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem


274

TRAINING BUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：３６：４７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２７９　

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.

If you want to retrain a programmedbutton for a new device, you do nothave to erase all button memory.You can replace the existing memorycode using this procedure:

If a standard transmitter wasprogrammed, the indicator willstay on for about 25 seconds.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go towww.homelink.com.

Once the HomeLink indicatorbegins to flash slowly, continue tohold the HomeLink button, andfollow steps 3 thru 6 under‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page

).

If a rolling code transmitter waspreviously programmed, theindicator will flash rapidly for 2seconds, and then stay on forabout 23 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton to be trained until theHomeLink indicator begins toflash slowly.

1.

2.

274




Erasing Codes

Retraining a ButtonCustomer Assistance


Features

275

０６／０８／０２　１０：３６：５７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２８０　

The HFL can store up to 50 namesand phone numbers in its phonebook.With a linked phone, you can thenautomatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.

Bluetooth is a registered trademarkof Bluetooth SIG, Inc.Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to the HFL.The HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth,which means the maximum rangebetween your phone and vehicle is30 feet (10 meters).

With a linked phone, the HFL allowsyou to send and receive calls in yourvehicle without holding the phone.

Your vehicle is equipped with theHandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL usesBluetooth technology as a wirelesslink between it and your Bluetoothcompatible cellphone. When you arein your vehicle and your phone islinked to the HFL, you’ll enjoyhands-free phone use. The HFL isavailable in both English and French(Canadian models only). To changethe language, see page . To use the HFL, your phone must

have approved Bluetooth capabilityalong with the Hands Free Profile.This type of phone is availablethrough many phone makers andcellular carriers. You can also find anapproved phone by visiting

( In Canada, visit) or by calling the

Hands Free Link customer supportat

HFL recognizes simple voicecommands, such as phone numbersand names. It uses these commandsto automatically dial, receive, andstore numbers. For moreinformation on voice control, seeUsing Voice Control on page .

Here are the main features of theHFL. Instructions for using the HFLbegin on page .

Your vehicle’s HFL system has thecellular phonebook import function.This allows you to import yourcellular phonebook to the HFL.Using the navigation system, you canmake a call directly and store adesired number in the HFL from thelist shown on the navigation display.For more information on how toimport the phonebook or to make acall, see page .

You can also store the desirednumber to the HFL directly fromyour cellphone using the receivecontact function in the HFL.

300

286

279

287handsfreelink.com.www.acura.ca.

(888) 528-7876.


On all models

Bluetooth Wireless Technology Phonebook

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Voice Control

HandsFreeLink

276

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３７：０９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２８１　

The HFL microphone is on theceiling, between the front map lightsand the console buttons. On modelswith navigation system, themicrophone is shared with thenavigation system.

When the HFL is in use, the soundcomes through the vehicle’s frontaudio system speakers. If the audiosystem is in use while operatingeither of HFL buttons or making acall, the HFL over-rides the audiosystem. To change the volume level,use the audio system volume knob.

To operate the HFL, use the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel.

The HFL buttons are used asfollows:

Press and release the button, thenwait for a beep before giving acommand.

HFL Back: This button is used toend a call, go back to the previousvoice control command, and tocancel an operation.HFL Talk: This button is used before

you give a command, to answerincoming calls, and to confirmsystem information.

HFL ButtonsMicrophone

Audio System

HandsFreeLink

Features

277

HFL TALK BUTTON

HFL BACK BUTTON

HFL BACKBUTTON

HFL TALK BUTTON

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３７：１８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２８２　

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－

－

－

＊

Signal Strength Indicates thenetwork signal strength of thecurrent phone. Five bars equalsfull strength.

ROAM Status Indicates yourphone is roaming.

Battery Level Status Indicatesthe power currently remaining inyour phone’s battery. Five barsequals full battery strength.

When you are operating the HFL, orwhen you manually select HFL onthe multi-information display, youwill see this information on thescreen:

Phone Dialing Indicates thenumber you entered or thenumber of the incoming call.

Some phones do not send thisinformation to the HFL.

HFL Mode Indicates when youare dialing and receiving calls.

:


HandsFreeLink

278

SIGNALSTRENGTH

BATTERYLEVEL STATUS

HFLMODE

ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３７：２６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２８３　

Here are some guidelines for usingvoice control:

All phones may notoperate identically, and some maycause inconsistent operation of theHFL.

The HFL is operated by the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. The nextfew pages provide instructions for allbasic features of the HFL.

To enter a command, press andrelease the Talk button. Then,after the beep, say your commandin a clear, natural tone.

Close the windows and themoonroof.

When voice commands are used,the fan speed will be automaticallyadjusted to low. However, forbetter voice recognition, loweringthe fan speed may be necessary.

Adjust the air flow from both thedashboard and side vents so theydo not blow against themicrophone on the ceiling.

After pressing the Talk button,wait for the beep, then give a voicecommand.

Give a voice command in a clearnatural speaking voice withoutpausing between words ornumbers. If the system cannotrecognize your command becauseof the background noise, speaklouder.

If the microphone picks up voicesother than yours, the system maynot interpret your voicecommands correctly.

If the HFL does not recognize acommand, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’If it doesn’t recognize thecommand a second time, itsresponse is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If itdoesn’t recognize the command athird time, it plays the Helpprompt.

CONTINUED

Using Voice ControlHow to Use the HFL

HandsFreeLink

Features

279

NOTE:

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３７：３７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２８４　

To hear a list of available optionsat any time, press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Handsfree link help.’’

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’

To enter a string of numbers in aCall or Dial command, you can saythem all at once, or you canseparate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,10, and 11.

To skip a voice prompt, press theTalk button while the HFL isspeaking. The HFL will then beginlistening for your next command.

To go back one step in a commandprocess, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or pressthe Back button.If nothing is said while the HFL islistening for a command, the HFLwill time out and stop its voicerecognition. The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins listening from the point atwhich it timed out.

To end a command sequence atany time, press and hold the Backbutton, or press and release theTalk button, wait for the beep, andsay, ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins from its main menu.

When you finish a commandsequence, the HFL goes back toits main menu. For example, whenyou store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ theHFL response is, ‘‘Eric has beenstored.’’ The next time you pressthe Talk button, you will be at themain menu.

HandsFreeLink

280

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３７：４４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２８５　

The voice of the HFL can be set tomale or female (U.S. models only).Also, the incoming notification canbe set to a ring tone, a prompt, or nonotification.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you likemale or female prompts?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or‘‘Female,’’ depending on thesystem voice you want. The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Male (Female)prompts have been selected.Would you like an audiblenotification of an incoming call?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘A ring tone will beused.’’ or ‘‘An incoming callprompt will be used.’’If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you willhear a ring tone through the audiospeakers to announce an incomingcall. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ youwill hear this message toannounce an incoming call: ‘‘Youhave an incoming call.’’

The HFL response continues ‘‘Asecurity option is available to lockthe HFL. Each time the vehicle isturned on, a passcode would berequired to use this system. Wouldyou like this security option turnedon?’’ If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ you can setyour passcode. Refer to the settingprocedure in the next column.

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, theHFL response is, ‘‘Would you likethe notification to be a ring tone ora prompt?’’ If you say ‘‘No’’ afterthe beep, the HFL returns to itsmain menu. Saying ‘‘No’’ will resultin no ring tone or prompt playbackduring an incoming call. The audiosystem will still mute, and amessage will be displayed.

4.

5.3.

2.

1.

6.

To set up the system, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Setting Up the System

Features

281

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３７：５２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２８６　

The HFL will accept a numeric, four-digit passcode that you can use forsecurity purposes.

Follow the system setupprocedure as described previously.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’

The HFL response is ‘‘What is thefour-digit number you would liketo set as your passcode?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitpasscode you want to use. Forexample, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is thiscorrect?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Security isenabled. Each time the vehicle isturned on, the passcode will berequired to use the system. Thesystem setup is complete.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘No.’’ after the beep, theHFL response is ‘‘Security will notbe used. The system setup iscomplete.’’

Once a passcode is set, you can lockthe HFL so it only operates after thepasscode is entered.

The HFL will prompt you for yourpasscode each time the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON (II)position and you press the Talkbutton. You will only be asked forthe passcode once per ignition

cycle. If the passcode is set, itsresponse is ‘‘The system is locked.What is the four-digit passcode?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say your four-digitpasscode. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3,4.’’

If the passcode is correct, the HFLresponse is ‘‘Main menu.’’ If thepasscode is not correct, the HFLresponse is ‘‘1,2,3,4 is incorrect.Please try again.’’ Go back to thestep 2.

If you forget your passcode and youcannot activate the HFL, consultyour dealer to cancel the passcode.

1.

4.

5.

6.2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

To set your passcode, do this:

To enter your passcode, do this;

HandsFreeLink

Setting Your Passcode

282

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３８：０４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２８７　

CONTINUED

Your Bluetooth compatible phonewith HandsFree Profile must bepaired to the HFL before you canmake and receive hands-free calls.

HFL does not allow you to pairyour phone if the vehicle ismoving.For pairing, your phone must be inits Discovery mode.Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFL.The following procedure works formost phones. If you cannot pairyour phone to the HFL with thisprocedure, refer to your phone’soperating manual, visit

, call theHandsFreeLink customer supportat or call your phoneretailer.

During the pairing process, turnoff any previously paired phonesbefore pairing a new phone.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Phone setup optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The pairingprocess requires operation of yourmobile phone. For safety, onlyperform this function while thevehicle is stopped. State a four-digit code for pairing. Note thiscode. It will be requested by thephone.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitcode you want to use. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Searching for aBluetooth phone.’’

Steps 5 and 6 show acommon way to get your phone intoits Discovery mode. If these steps donot work on your phone, refer to thephone’s operating manual.

Follow the prompts on your phoneto get it into its Discovery mode.The phone will search for the HFL.When it comes up, selectHandsFreeLink from the list ofoptions displayed on your phone.

3.

1.

2.

4.

5.

handsfreelink.com

(888) 528-7876

HandsFreeLink

Pairing Your Phone

Features

283

NOTE:

NOTE:

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３８：１５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２８８　

When asked by the phone, enterthe four-digit code from step 3 intoyour phone. The HFL response is‘‘A new phone has been found.What would you like to name thisphone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to use. For example, say‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘Eric’s phone has beensuccessfully paired. Returning tothe main menu.’’

If you want to pair another phone,repeat steps 1 through 7.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the new nameof the phone. For example, say‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘The name has been changed.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Which phonewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to delete. Forexample say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you liketo delete Eric’s phone?’’

Once the pairing process iscompleted, AcuraLink may display aconnection confirmation screen. Thisscreen is used to create a dataconnection between your cellphoneand the AcuraLink system. You canchoose to set up the data connectionnow, or do it later. If you want to do

it now, exit the HFL menu bypressing the HFL Back button oneor more times.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Which phonewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to rename.For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenew name for Eric’s phone?’’

2.

1.

1.

2.

6.

7.

8.3.

4.

3.

To delete a paired phone, do this:

To rename a paired phone, do this:

HandsFreeLink

284

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３８：２６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２８９　

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing todelete Eric’s phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ tocontinue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel.’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, theHFL response is ‘‘The phone hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not bedeleted.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing the nameof each paired phone. When all

phones paired to the system havebeen read, the HFL response is‘‘The entire list has been read.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ Anexample of the HFL response is,‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Batterystrength is three bars. Signalstrength is five bars, and thephone is roaming. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Searchingfor the next phone.’’ The HFLthen disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone. If no other phones arefound, the first phone remainslinked.

1.

2.

1.

2.

1.

4.

5.

To list all paired phones, do this:

To find out the status of the phone beingused, do this:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Features

285

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３８：３４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２９０　

You can make calls using any phonenumber, or by using a name in theHFL phonebook. You can also redialthe last number called. During a call,the HFL allows you to talk up to 30minutes after you remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to call. For example, say‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, orcontinue to add numbers.’’

You can also make a call directlyfrom the list shown on thenavigation display.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

1.

2.

4.

3.

To make a call using a phone number,do this:


HandsFreeLink

Making a Call

286

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３８：４２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２９１　

To make a call using a name in the HFLphonebook, do this:

To send a number during a call, do this:

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to call. For example, say‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

To redial the last number called bythe phone, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

The HFL allows you to sendnumbers or names during a call. Thisis useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. You can alsoprogram account numbers into theHFL phonebook for easy retrievalduring menu-driven calls.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to send. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue toadd numbers.’’

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

4.

HandsFreeLink

Sending Numbers or NamesDuring a Call

Features

287

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３８：５１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２９２　

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to send. For example, say‘‘Account number.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Would you like tosend account number?’’

If you receive a call when you are noton the phone, the HFL interrupts theaudio system (if it is on), and playsthe incoming call notification, ifactivated. To answer the call, pressthe Talk button and begin speaking.If you don’t want to answer the call,press the Back button.

If your phone has Call Waiting, andyou receive a call when you are onthe phone, press and release theTalk button to answer it. When youdo this, the original call is placed onhold. To return to the original call,press the Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the new call,disregard it, and continue with youroriginal call. If you want to hang upthe original call and answer the newcall, press the Back button.

During a call, you can transfer itfrom the HFL to your phone, or fromyour phone to the HFL.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ Theaudio switches from the HFL to thephone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ Theaudio switches from your phone tothe HFL.

2.

1.

3.

3.

To send a name during a call, do this: To transfer a call from the HFL to yourphone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to theHFL, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Receiving a Call Transferring a Call

288

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３９：０１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２９３　

CONTINUED

During a call, you can mute orunmute your voice to the person youare talking to.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute iscanceled.’’

The HFL phonebook can store up to50 names with their associatednumbers. These can be any types ofnumbers. For example, you can storea phone number and use it to make acall, or you can store an accountnumber and use it during a call to amenu-driven phone system.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete,receive contact, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to store?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenumber for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is thenumber for account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the number.For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’The HFL response is ‘‘123 4567891.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Eric (or accountnumber) has been stored.Returning to the main menu.’’

1.

2.

4.

5.

3.

1.

2.

To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this: To add a name, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Muting a Call Setting up the Phonebook

Features

289

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３９：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２９４　

To edit the number of a name, do this:

To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, dothis:


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to edit. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘What is the new number forEric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the newnumber for Eric. For example, say‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The number hasbeen changed. Returning to themain menu.’’


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to delete. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Do you want to delete Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘The name hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘ThePhonebook options are store, edit,delete, receive contact, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. Whenthe end of the list is reached, theHFL response is, ‘‘The entire listhas been read. Returning to themain menu.’’

2.

1.

3.

4.

2.

1.

2.

3.

1.

4.5.

HandsFreeLink

290

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３９：２３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２９５　

？

To call a name from the phonebook list,do this:

handsfreelink.com

To store a phone number from yourphone:


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. When itsays the name you want to call, forexample, Eric, press the Talkbutton, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Would you liketo call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Onceconnected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob.

You can store the desired number tothe HFL phonebook directly fromyour cellular phone.

NOTE: Your phone may not havethis capability. Visitor See your phone’s owner’s manualfor information.

With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘Phonebook options are store,edit, delete, receive contact andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Receivecontact.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘The receive process requiresoperation of your Bluetooth device.For safety, only perform thisfunction while the vehicle isstopped. HFL is now waiting toreceive contact from a Bluetoothdevice.’’

Select a desired number from thelist on your phone, and transmit/send (individual steps will vary foreach type of phone, refer to yourphone’s owner’s manual) viaBluetooth. The HFL response is‘‘One phone number has beenreceived for this contact. Whatname would you like to store forthe mobile number To discardthis, say ‘Discard.’ ’’

2.

1.

3.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLink

Storing a Phone Number Directlyfrom Your Phone

Features

291

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３９：３２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２９６　

？

？

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Neil at work.’’ The HFLreponse is, ‘‘Neil at work will bestored. Is this correct ’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘Neilat work has been stored. If morethan one number was received forthe contact entry, the HFL asksfor the name of the next number.If only one number is received, orall numbers have been stored, theHFL response is, ‘‘Would you likeHFL to receive another contact?’’

If you want to continue to storeany other numbers, press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘HFL is now waitingto receive a contact from aBluetooth device.’’

Select a desired number from thelist on your phone, and transmit/send (individual steps will vary foreach type of phone, refer to yourphone’s owner’s manual) viaBluetooth. The HFL response is‘‘One phone number has beenreceived for this contact. Whatname would you like to store forthe mobile number To discardthis, say ‘Discard.’ ’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Susan ar work.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Susan at work will bestored. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Susanat work has been stored. Wouldyou like HFL to receive anothercontact?’’

If you do not want to continue tostore any other numbers, pressand release the Talk button. Afterthe beep, say ‘‘No.’’

5.

4. 6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

HandsFreeLink

292

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３９：３９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２９７　

CONTINUED


handsfreelink.com

The cellular phonebook optionallows you to store up to 1,000 namesand 10,000 phone numbers in thephonebook of HandsFreeLink fromyour cellular phonebook. With theHFL, you can then automatically dialany name or number in thephonebook.

NOTE: Your phone may not havethis capability. Visitor See your phone’s owner’s manualfor information.

To use the cellular phonebook withthe HFL, say or select ‘‘CellularPhonebook’’ from the Informationscreen. The navigation display willchange as shown above.

If any phonebook is not stored andphone is not linked to the HFL,Cellular Phonebook is grayed out.

PIN Number. This option allows youto add, change or remove a PINNumber for any phonebook that hasbeen imported.

Import Cellular Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to store thephonebook of your cellular phone inthe HFL. When you link your phoneto the HFL and select this option, thesystem will start importing andloading the phonebook.

HandsFreeLink

Cellular Phonebook Options

Features

293

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３９：４７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２９８　

Search Imported Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to search thephone numbers stored in the HFL.When you enter keyword for aperson’s name, such as the firstname or last name, the system willfind the number you want and letyou make calls.

Delete Imported Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to delete the storedphonebook from the HFL. When youlink your phone to the HFL andselect this option, the system willautomatically delete the phonebookof the linked phone from the HFL(see page ).

You can import the phonebook ofyour cellular phone in the HFL. Linkyour phone to the HFL and select‘‘Import Cellular Phonebook’’ fromthe ‘‘Select an option’’ screen. Whenthe message ‘‘The import wassuccessful.’’ is displayed, push in onthe Interface Dial to select ‘‘OK.’’

HFL does not allow you to pairyour phone if the vehicle ismoving.Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFL.

For information on linking to theHFL, see page .283

297

To import the cellular phonebook

HandsFreeLink

294

NOTE:

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：３９：５４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０２９９　

To search the imported phonebook

You can search the stored numberby entering keywords to make callsby using the HFL.

Select ‘‘Search Imported Phonebook’’from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.The display will change as shownabove.

Select a phonebook from thedisplayed list. If the phonebook youselect has a PIN icon, you will needthe 4-digit PIN number to access thephonebook. The following screenwill appear.

Enter the PIN number to access thephonebook. You cannot access a PINprotected phonebook if you do notuse the correct PIN number.

Enter the keyword for a person’sname, such as the first name or lastname, using the Interface Dial. If thesystem does not find an exact match,say or select ‘‘LIST’’ when you finishentering the keyword.

The system will display a list ofperson’s names, with the closestmatch to the name you entered atthe top of the list.

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLink

Features

295

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：４０：０３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３００　

－Select the number (1 6) of thedesired person from the list.

Up to three category icons aredisplayed in the right side of the list.These category icons indicate howmany numbers are stored for theperson.If a name has more than threecategory icons,‘‘ ’’ is displayed.

The following category icons willappear:

After selecting a person, the systemwill display a list of the person’sphone numbers.

Select the desired number from thelist to make a call.

…

HandsFreeLink

296

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

Preference

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：４０：１４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３０１　

To store in the HandsFreeLink To delete the imported phonebook

Say or select ‘‘STORE INHandsFreeLink’’ from the ‘‘Select anumber to call’’ screen. The screenshown above will appear.

Select the desired number from thelist to store it in the HFL.

You can delete the storedphonebook from the HFL.Link your phone to the HFL andselect ‘‘Delete Imported Phonebook’’from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.The display will change as shownabove.

Select a phonebook from thedisplayed list. If the phonebook youselect has a PIN icon, you will needthe 4-digit PIN number to access thephonebook. The following screenwill appear.

Enter the PIN number to access thephonebook. You cannot access a PINprotected phonebook if you do notuse the correct PIN number.

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLink

Features

297

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：４０：２３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３０２　

After you enter the correct PINnumber, or if the phonebook youselect is not PIN protected, thefollowing screen appears.

Say or select ‘‘Yes’’, and the message‘‘The imported phonebook has beendeleted.’’ will appear. Select ‘‘OK’’ tocomplete the deletion.

You can add, change or remove aPIN number from any phonebook.Select ‘‘PIN Number’’ from the‘‘Select an Option’’ screen. Thedisplay will change as shown above.

Select the phonebook that youwish to add the PIN number to.The phonebook you select cannotalready have a PIN icon. Thedisplay will change as shownabove.

1.

To add, change or remove a PINnumber from any phonebook

To add a PIN number

HandsFreeLink

298

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：４０：３１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３０３　

Enter the 4-digit PIN number. Youwill be asked to re-enter the PIN toverify.

Select the phonebook that youwish to change the PIN numberfor. The display will change asshown above.

Enter your current PIN number.2. 2.1.

To change a PIN number

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLink

Features

299

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：４０：３９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３０４　

Enter your new 4-digit PINnumber. You will be asked to re-enter the PIN to verify.

This operation clears the HFL ofyour passcode, your paired phones,all names in the HFL phonebook,and all imported phonebooks.Clearing is recommended before yousell your vehicle.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘This processwill clear all paired phones, clearall entries in the phonebook, andclear the passcode. Is this whatyou would like to do?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing toclear all paired phones, allphonebook entries, and thepasscode. This may take up to 2minutes to complete.’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed, or say‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’

If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a shortperiod of time, the HFL responseis, ‘‘System has been cleared.Returning to the main menu.’’3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To clear the system, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Clearing the System

300

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：４０：４７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３０５　

＜＞

＜＞

Canadian models onlyTo change from English to French, dothis:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Changelanguage.’’ The HFL response is‘‘English or French?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Vous avezselectionne Francais. Les nomsenregistres en mode Anglais neseront pas accessible en modeFrancais. Voulez-vous continuer?You have selected French. Nametags that were stored while inEnglish mode will not beaccessible in French mode. Wouldyou like to continue? ’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Oui’’ or ‘‘Yes.’’If there are no paired phoneswithout French name tags, theHFL response is ‘‘Venillezattendre que le systeme change delangue. Please wait while thelanguage is changed.’’ ‘‘La languea ete changee. Retour au menuprincipal.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout French name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

The HFL response is, for example,‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour

Paul’s phone ?’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est lenom Français pour Pat’sphone ?’’ Press and release theTalk button. Say ‘‘Téléphone dePat.’’ After all paired phonesmissing a French name tag are re-recorded, the HFL will prompt,‘‘Retour au menu principal.’’

If there are paired phones withoutFrench name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘Pour que le systèmeidentifie les téléphones qui ont étéjumelés dans une autre langue, lesnoms des téléphones doivent être ré-enregistrés.’’

1.

2.

3. 4.

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLink

Changing Language

Features

301

NOTE:

TM

０６／０８／０２　１０：４０：５５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３０６　

＜＞

＜＞

To change from French to English, dothis:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘ChangerLangue.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Anglais ou Francais?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ or ‘‘Oui.’’If there are no paired phoneswithout English name tags, theHFL response is ‘‘Please waitwhile the language is changed.Venillez attendre que le systemechange de langue.’’ ‘‘The languagehas been changed. Returning tothe main menu.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout English name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

If there are paired phones withoutEnglish name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘The language hasbeen changed. For the system toidentify phones that were pairedwhile in another language, thephone names need to be re-recorded.’’

The HFL says, for example, ‘‘Whatis the English name for

Téléphone de Paul ?’’ Pressand release the Talk button. Afterthe beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘What is theEnglish name for Téléphone dePat ?’’ Press and release the Talkbutton. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’sphone.’’ After all paired phonesmissing an English name tag arere-recorded, the HFL will say‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’

In addition, you cannot use the HFLwhile using AcuraLink.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Anglais.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘You haveselected English. Name tags thatwere stored while in French modewill not be accessible in Englishmode. Would you like to continue?Vous avez selectionne Anglais. Lesnoms enregistres en modeFrancais ne seront pas accessibleen mode Anglais. Voulez-vouscontnuez?’’

4.

1.

2.

3.

HandsFreeLink

HFL Limitations

302

NOTE:

TM

０６／０８／０２　１７：３７：２１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３０７　

Most AcuraLink functions arecontrolled by the interface dial. Theinterface dial has two parts, a knoband a selector.

The knob turns left and right. Use itto make selections or adjustments toa list or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left,right, up, down, and in. Use theselector to scroll through lists, toselect menus, and to highlight menuitems. When you make a selection,push the center of the selector(ENTER) to go to that selection.

AcuraLink enhances your ownershipexperience by providing a directcommunication link between yourvehicle and the Acura Server.Working through the XM radiosatellite, AcuraLink works inconjunction with the navigationsystem, HandsFreeLink (HFL), andaudio system in your vehicle. Itdisplays and receives several kindsof messages, including:

Operating tips and information onyour vehicle’s features.

Important recall and safetyinformation.

Maintenance information to keepyour vehicle in top condition.

Diagnostic information to provideinformation about any problemswith your vehicle.

U.S. Technology and Sport Packages Interface Dial

AcuraLink

Features

303

SELECTOR

KNOB ENTER

０６／０８／０２　１０：４１：１１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３０８　

If you have new messages, anenvelope icon appears in the topright corner of the navigation screen.

To open a message:Press ENTER on the interfaceselector, then select New Messagefrom the navigation system mapmenu.

A list of all messages will be shown.New Messages will be at the top.Select the message you want to readby pressing ENTER.

To view previously read messages:

Press the INFO button. Theinformation screen will be shown.

Reading Messages

AcuraLink

304

０６／０８／０２　１０：４１：１９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３０９　

Unread messages have a closedenvelope icon next to them. The icondisappears when it has already beenread.

Only diagnostic infomessages overlay the navigationscreen while driving. They indicate ifyour vehicle has a problem that mayneed immediate attention (see page

).

After purchasing your vehicle,messages may not appearimmediately.Your dealer has to register thevehicle identification before you canreceive messages. This can takeseveral days to process.

Select ‘‘Messages’’, then select amessage category by pressingENTER. Select the message youwant to read and press ENTER.

When you open a message, you canread a summary of it, and thenchoose one of several options. If anoption is not available for a message,that button will not be highlighted.

310

CONTINUED

AcuraLink

Message Options

Features

305

NOTE:

０６／０８／０２　１０：４１：２７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３１０　

－

－

－

－－

－

Select this button todelete the current message.

Select this button to hear avoice read the entire message. Thisgives you more information than thescreen can display at one time. Whenyou select the Voice button, itchanges to a Stop Reading button.Select the button again to stop thevoice.

Select this button to call aphone number embedded in themessage. When you select , theHandsFreeLink (HFL) dials thenumber for you.

Select thisbutton to get more information aboutthe current diagnostic message. Touse this option, your cellphone mustbe paired with the HFL. In addition,the paired phone must have acompatible data service and be setup with the AcuraLink system tomake a data connection. Access thehandsfreelink.com website to findout which data services are currentlycompatible with AcuraLink.

To set your AcuraLink preferences(the types of messages you want toreceive, if any), visit the Owner Linkwebsite at www.owners.acura.com,and choose what you would like toreceive. If you do not have internetaccess, call Acura Client Services at(800) 382-2238; they can set yourmessage preferences for you.

Select this button to find the nearestAcura dealer using the navigationsystem.

Selectthis button to call the Acura dealeryou purchased your vehicle from.AcuraLink also directs you to thisdealer so you can schedule amaintenance appointment or receiveinformation about a message. If yourassigned servicing dealer changes,AcuraLink will reset to call thatdealer.

To make a call, your Bluetoothcompatible phone must be paired tothe vehicle’s HandsFreeLink system,powered on, and located within thevehicle (see page ).276

Delete

Voice

Call

Call

Diagnostic Info

Message Preferences

Find Nearest Acura Dealer

Call Your Acura Dealer

AcuraLink

306

０６／０８／０２　１０：４１：３４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３１１　

Diagnostic info and recall/campaign messages can only bedeleted by your dealer.To delete a single message:

Press the INFO button to bring upthe Information screen.

Scroll to the Messages option,then select it by pressing ENTERon the interface selector.

Select the message category thatcontains the message you want todelete.

Use the interface knob to scroll upor down to the message title youwant to delete, and select it bypressing ENTER on the interfaceselector.

Scroll to Delete with the interfaceknob, and select it by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

To delete all messages:

The Delete All Messagescommand does not apply toDiagnostic Info and Recall messages.They can only be deleted by yourdealer.

Press the SETUP button to viewthe setup screen.

Use the interface knob to scroll tothe AcuraLink/Messages button,and select it by pressing ENTERon the interface selector.

Scroll to the Delete Messagesoption, and select it by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to the category with themessages you want to delete, andselect the category by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

Select MORE by pushing theinterface selector to the right.

AcuraLink

Deleting Messages

Features

307

NOTE:NOTE:

０６／０８／０２　１０：４１：４５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３１２　

There are six message categories inAcuraLink: Quick Tips, FeatureGuides, Maintenance Minders,Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info,and Dealer Appointment Reminders.The system can store up to 256messages.

Message categories can be added,revised, or deleted throughbroadcast messages from Acura.

These messages, based on updatedvehicle information and commentsfrom other MDX owners,supplement your Owner’s Manualand Quick Start Guide. They provideyou with relevant information for asafe and enjoyable ownershipexperience. For additionalinformation, call Acura ClientServices directly through the HFL.

During the first 90 days ofownership, one of up to 32 differentmessages appears each day. Thesemessages help you to use andunderstand the features of yourvehicle.

Feature GuideQuick TipsMessage Categories

AcuraLink

308

０６／０８／０２　１０：４１：５３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３１３　

If your vehicle is affected by a recallor other important safetyinformation, a letter will be mailed toyou about the issue and how to fix it.If you don’t get your vehicle fixed,you will also receive a remindermessage through AcuraLink. Youcan then use the message options tocall your dealer for an appointmentor to find the nearest dealer.

You can then use the messageoptions to call your dealer for anappointment or to find the nearestdealer.

These messages provide detailedinformation about the serviceneeded for your vehicle. When amaintenance message appears onthe multi-information display, a list ofneeded maintenance items alsoappears in an AcuraLink message.These messages tell you the exactmaintenance needed, helping you toavoid unnecessary maintenancecosts.

Recall/CampaignsMaintenance Minder

AcuraLink

Features

309

０６／０８／０２　１０：４２：０１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３１４　

When an indicator comes on or amessage is displayed on the Multi-Information Display (MID),AcuraLink can provide informationabout the cause of the indicator ormessage and the recommendedaction to address it. This helps youhandle the problem as it occurs,preventing or limiting costly repairs.

When an indicator comes on or amessage is displayed on the MID,AcuraLink immediately notifies youwith the message, ‘‘An indicator is on.AcuraLink can help you decide whatto do.’’ If you do not want theinformation right away, select theCheck Later option. If you want theinformation now, select the CheckNow option. (If the navigation screenis not active, you must select OKfrom the navigation disclaimerscreen before you can check the

information.)

Depending on the severity of theproblem, the message will let youknow if you should see your dealerimmediately or if you can wait until alater date.

The AcuraLink system cannotdetermine some mechanicalproblems (such as squeaks orrattles) that are not triggered by thediagnostic indicator monitors.

For more information on theinstrument panel indicators, see page

.64

Diagnostic Info

AcuraLink

310

０６／０８／０２　１０：４２：０７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３１５　

When you make an appointmentthrough the Owner Link OnlineScheduling Service, you can bereminded about that appointmentthrough AcuraLink in advance. Ifyou need to reschedule, you can callyour dealer directly with the HFL.

The timing of your reminder isbased on your reminder preferenceestablished on Owner Link.

When viewing a diagnostic infomessage through the INFO menu,you can use the Diagnostic Infobutton to connect to the Acuraserver to retrieve the latestinformation regarding the problem.

NOTE: There may not be anyadditional information depending onthe time elapsed since the previoustime you retrieved the informationfrom the Acura server.

You can then use the messageoptions to call your dealer for anappointment or to find the nearestdealer.

Dealer Appointment Reminder

AcuraLink

Features

311

０６／０８／０２　１０：４２：１４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３１６　

－

－

－

To access the following functions,press the SETUP button, push theinterface dial to the right to selectMORE, then rotate the interface dialto select AcuraLink/Messages.

Select thisbutton to delete all stored messageswithin a category, except fordiagnostic info and recall campaignmessages. These messages can onlybe deleted by a certified technicianafter the recall is done or theproblem is corrected, or through abroadcast message from Acura.

Select ON if you want to be notifiedof new messages (envelope iconappears on the navigation screen).Select OFF if you do not want to benotified of new messages (envelopeicon does not appear on the screen).Messages can still be accessed usingthe INFO menu. If you would like tostop receiving messages, visit theOwnerLink website at www.owners.acura.com to change your messagingpreferences.

Select ON to havethe system automatically read eachmessage to you. Select OFF tomanually select the Voice buttonwhen you want a message read toyou.

AcuraLink/Message Screen

Delete Messages

New Message Notification

Auto Reading

AcuraLink

312

０６／０８／０２　１０：４２：２１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３１７　

－－Selectthis button to begin the processrequired to connect to Acura. This isused to access the most recentdiagnostic information when aproblem occurs.

For the Phone DataConnection button to be active, youneed a Bluetooth compatible andenabled cellphone paired to theHandsFreeLink (HFL), and acompatible data service (see

on page ).

The default setting is prompt. Whena diagnostic info message appears,and you select the Check Nowbutton, the system will prompt youbefore connecting to the Acuraserver. If you do not wish to connectat that time, select No at the prompt,and you will see the informationfrom the onboard database. The‘‘Auto’’ setting will remove theprompt when you select the CheckNow button and will automaticallyconnect to the Acura server. Thissetting only applies when you have aBluetooth enabled phone that ispaired with the HFL and you havecompleted the Phone-DataConnection setup.

To find more information onBluetooth compatible and enabledcellphones, visit

283

handsfreelink.com. orcall the Hands Free Link customersupport at (888) 528-7876.

Phone-Data Connection Connect to the Acura Server

PairingYour Phone

AcuraLink

Features

313

NOTE:

０６／０８／０２　１０：４２：２８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３１８　

Since the rearview camera displayarea is limited, you should alwaysback up slowly and carefully, andlook behind you for obstacles.

Whenever you shift to reverse (R)with the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the rear view is shownon the navigation system screen.

For the best picture, always keep therearview camera clean, and do notcover the camera lens. To avoidscratching the lens when you clean it,use a moist, soft cloth.


Rearview Camera and Monitor

314

０６／０８／０２　１０：４２：３２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３１９　

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 316.................Fuel Recommendation . 316

.........Service Station Procedures . 317....................................Refueling . 317

.....Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 318Opening and Closing the

.......................................Hood . 319...................................Oil Check . 320

.............Engine Coolant Check . 320...............................Fuel Economy . 321

...Accessories and Modifications . 322.............................Carrying Cargo . 324

Before Driving

Before

Driving

315

０６／０８／０２　１０：４２：３６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３２０　

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon premium unleaded gasoline with apump octane of 91 or higher. If thisoctane grade is unavailable, regularunleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane of 87 or higher may be usedtemporarily. The use of regularunleaded gasoline can cause metallicknocking noises in the engine andwill result in decreased engineperformance. The long-term use ofregular-grade gasoline can lead toengine damage.

We recommend quality gasolinescontaining detergent additives thathelp prevent fuel system and enginedeposits.In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10% ethanol byvolume and up to 15% MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Quick Start Guide

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

316

０６／０８／０２　１０：４２：４７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３２１　

CONTINUED

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pressingthe button on the driver’s door.(To open the fuel fill doormanually, see page .)

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

eventhough the tank is not full, there maybe a problem with your vehicle’s fuelvapor recovery system. The systemhelps keep fuel vapors from goinginto the atmosphere. Consult yourdealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

433

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Refueling

Service Station Procedures

Before

Driving

317

Push

TETHER

HOLDER

FUEL FILL CAP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

０６／０８／０２　１０：４２：５７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３２２　

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUELCAP’’ message on the multi-information display (see rightcolumn on this page), and themalfunction indicator lamp mayalso come on (see page ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Your vehicle’s on board diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay. Turn the engine off, andconfirm the fuel fill cap is installed. Ifit is, loosen it, then retighten it untilit clicks at least once. The messageshould go off after several days ofnormal driving once you tighten or

replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll toanother message, press the INFObutton. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’message will appear each time yourestart the engine until the systemturns the message off.

If the system still detects a leak inthe vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .

5.

6.

431

431

Tighten Fuel Cap Message


318

０６／０８／０２　１０：４３：０３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３２３　

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to your left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift up the hood.

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,or if you can open the hood withoutlifting the handle, the mechanismshould be cleaned and lubricated.

To close the hood, lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then press down firmly withyour hands. Make sure it is securelylatched.

1. 2.

3.


Opening and Closing the Hood

Before

Driving

319

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

LATCH

０６／０８／０２　１０：４３：１１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３２４　

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Hold the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel, and theninsert it all the way back in its hole.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

1.

3.

2.

4.

390

381

387

Oil Check

Adding Engine Oil

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks


320

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

RESERVE TANK

MINMAX

０６／０８／０２　１０：４３：２１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３２５　

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenancemessages. See

(page ).

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

381

For example,

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Fuel Economy

Before

Driving

321

０６／０８／０２　１０：４３：２９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３２６　

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation of your vehicle.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. In these areas,accessories may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Your dealer has Acura accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andTire Pressure Monitoring System.

If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Although non-Acura accessories mayfit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

438

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

322

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０６／０８／０２　１０：４３：３７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３２７　

Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withaftermarket components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or

any other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Lowering your vehicle with anon-Acura suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with a non-Acura suspension kit can affectthe handling and stability.

Non-Acura wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire PressureMonitoring System.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

Before

Driving

323

０６／０８／０２　１０：４３：４６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３２８　

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove box

Rear cargo area, including thesecond and third row seats whenfolded flatConsole compartment

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Rear compartmentRoof-rack (if equipped)

Storage compartment

Door and seat-back pockets

Carrying Cargo

324

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

GLOVE BOX DOOR POCKETS

REAR COMPARTMENT

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

CARGO AREA

０６／０８／０２　１０：４３：５４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３２９　

－ ×

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 1,158lbs ’’ on your vehicle’s placard. Theplacard is driver’s doorjamb.

To determine the correct cargo andluggage load limit:

The maximum load for your vehicleis 1,158 lbs (525 kg). This figureincludes the total weight of alloccupants, cargo, and accessories,and the tongue load if you are towinga trailer.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from1,158 lbs.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.

For example, the maximum load is1,158 lbs and there will be five 150lbs passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo is 408 lbs.[1,158 750 (5 150) = 408 lbs.]

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessoriescargo must not exceed the grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR) or thegross axle weight rating (GAWR).Both are on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Determine the combined weightof accessories, luggage, and cargobeing loaded in the vehicle. Theweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, the load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

356

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

325

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０６／０８／０２　１０：４４：０４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３３０　

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, the proper operation of theseats, or proper operation of thesensors under the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 165 lbs (75 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the informationthat came with your roof rack.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you fold down the second orthird row seats, tie down itemsthat could be thrown about thevehicle during a crash or suddenstop.

58

Carrying Cargo in the PassengerCompartment

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

Carrying Cargo

326

０６／０８／０２　１０：４４：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３３１　

Your vehicle also has a grocery hookon each side panel in the cargo area.They are designed to hold lightitems. Heavy objects may damagethe hook. Make sure any items puton each hook weigh less than 6.5 lbs(3 kg).

The four hooks on the side panelscan be used to install a net forsecuring items. Each hook isdesigned to hold up to 50 lbs (23 kg)of weight.

The separation net can be used tohold back soft, lightweight itemsstored in the cargo area. Heavyitems should be tied down, as the netmay not prevent them from beingthrown about the vehicle in a crashor a sudden stop.

The cargo cover can be used tocover the cargo area behind the thirdrow seats. When the third row seatsare folded down, the cargo cover canbe extended over the larger area. Donot install the cover over the largerarea if the third row seats are notfolded down.

Carrying Cargo

Cargo HooksOptional Separation Net

Optional Cargo Cover Before

Driving

327

CARGOHOOKS

GROCERY HOOKS

０６／０８／０２　１０：４４：２０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３３２　

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the super handling-all wheeldrive (SH-AWD) system, the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system, activedamper system, the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS), andfacts you need if you are planning totow a trailer or drive off-high way.

........................Driving Guidelines . 330

........................Preparing to Drive . 330.......................Starting the Engine . 332

Check Starting System.................................Message . 332

..............Automatic Transmission . 333Super Handling-All Wheel Drive

...................(SH-AWD) System . 340...........................................Parking . 342

Tire Pressure Monitoring System......................................(TPMS) . 343

.............................Braking System . 348...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 349

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)........................................System . 351

................Active Damper System . 353...........................Towing a Trailer . 355

..................Trailer Stability Assist . 367..............Off-Highway Guidelines . 369

Driving

Driving

329

０６／０８／０２　１０：４４：２６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３３４　

Because your vehicle rides higheroff the ground, it has a high centerof gravity that can cause it to rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherroll over rate than other types ofvehicles.

To prevent rollovers or loss ofcontrol:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

Your vehicle has higher groundclearance that allows you to travelover bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides goodvisibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.140

See page for off-highway drivingguidelines.

369

Driving Guidelines, Preparing to Drive

Driving Guidelines Preparing to Drive

330

０６／０８／０２　１０：４４：３７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３３５　

CONTINUED

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors and tailgateare securely closed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel, and themessages on the multi-informationdisplay (see page , and

).Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, thenrelease the ignition switch. You donot need to hold the ignitionswitch in the START (III) positionto start the engine. Depending onthe outside temperature, the

starter motor runs for about 6 to 9seconds until the engine starts.

If you hold the ignition switch inthe START (III) position for morethan 7 seconds, the starter motor,depending on the outsidetemperature, runs for about 10 to25 seconds until the engine starts.

If the engine does not start, wait atleast 10 seconds before tryingagain.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Apply the parking brake.

Your vehicle’s starting system has anauto control mode. When you turnthe ignition switch to the START(III) position, this feature keeps theengine’s starter motor running untilthe engine starts. Follow theseinstructions to start the engine:

1.

2.

3.

4.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

15

63 72

152

124

81128

Preparing to Drive, Starting the Engine

Starting the Engine

Driving

331

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

０６／０８／０２　１０：４４：５０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３３６　

If this message is on, the ignitionswitch has to be held in theSTART (III) position manuallyuntil the engine starts. Theignition switch can be held in thatposition up to 15 seconds.

Even though you may be able tostart the engine manually withoutthe auto control mode of the startingsystem, have your dealer inspectyour vehicle.

If there is a problem with thestarting system, you will see a‘‘CHECK STARTING SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay when the ignition switch isturned to the ON (II) position. Youwill also see this message when theauto control mode of the startingsystem has a problem.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

5.

6.

Starting the Engine

Check Starting System Message

332

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

０６／０８／０２　１０：４４：５７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３３７　

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of apossible problem with thetransmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECKTRANSMISSION’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in. In the SequentialSportShift Mode, the ‘‘M’’ indicatornext to the ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on,and the illuminated number underthe charging system indicator showsyou the gear you have selected.

To shift from Park to any position,press firmly on the brake pedal andpress the release button on the frontof the shift lever, then pull the lever.You cannot shift out of Park whenthe ignition switch is in the LOCK(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.82

CONTINUED

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Automatic Transmission

Driving

333

０６／０８／０２　１０：４５：０５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３３８　

－

－

－

－

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and press the release buttonon the front of the shift lever to shiftfrom Park to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and press the release buttonon the shift lever. Make sure yourfoot is off the accelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .338

Do this:Press the brake pedal, andpress the shift lever releasebutton.Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to DD to DD to NN to DR to N

3

3


Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

334

０６／０８／０２　１０：４５：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３３９　

－

＋

With the shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position,you can select the SequentialSportShift mode to shift gears muchlike a manual transmission, butwithout a clutch pedal.

To enter the Sequential SportShiftmode, move the shift lever further tothe driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D,’’move the shift lever to thepassenger’s side.In Sequential SportShift mode, eachtime you push forward on the shiftlever, the transmission shifts to ahigher gear. Pull back on the lever todownshift. The number of the gearselected is displayed on theinstrument panel.

When you move the shift lever from‘‘D’’ to ‘‘M’’ position, the displayshows the selected gear.

The transmission remains in theselected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). Thereis no automatic downshift when youpush the accelerator pedal to thefloor.

When you accelerate away from astop, the transmission starts in firstgear. You have to manually upshiftbetween first and fifth gears. Makesure you upshift before the enginespeed reaches the tachometer’s redzone.

CONTINUED

Sequential SportShift Mode


Driving

335

SELECTED GEAR ( ) DOWN SHIFT

( ) UP SHIFT

０６／０８／０２　１０：４５：２１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３４０　

→

→

→

→

The transmission may automaticallydownshift from the higher gear tothe lower gear under theseconditions:

Driving on level roads and downhill

Driving uphill

To shift from

4 3

5 4

To shift from

4 3

5 4

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing, and provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.

If you try to manually downshift at aspeed that would cause the engine toexceed the redline in a lower gear,the transmission does not downshift.The gear indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to the higher gear.

If the vehicle speed slows to belowthe redline of the selected lower gearposition while the indicator isflashing, the transmissiondownshifts, and the display showsthe selected lower gear.

Speed range

under 19 mph(31 km/h)


Speed range



The transmission also shiftsautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It downshifts to firstgear when the vehicle speed is under10 mph (16 km/h).


336

０６／０８／０２　１０：４５：２９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３４１　

→

→

→

→

→

→

→

The table shows the speed rangesfor upshifting and downshifting. When you are in Sequential

SportShift mode, and the vehicle isstopped, push forward on the shiftlever to shift to second gear. Youwill see ‘‘2’’ in the display. Startingout in second gear will help toreduce wheelspin in deep snow oron a slippery surface.

If you start out in second gear, thetransmission will be fixed in thatgear.

To shift from

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

To shift from

3 2

4 3

5 4

Speed range

over 0 mph(0 km/h)

over 10 mph(16 km/h)



Speed range




The transmission will notautomatically downshift to first geareven when the vehicle speed isunder 10 mph (16 km/h). You needto shift down to first gear manually.

CONTINUED

Starting in Second Gear


Driving

337

０６／０８／０２　１０：４５：３７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３４２　

－If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

This position issimilar to D, except only the firstthree gears are selected. Use Dwhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain,or to provide engine braking whengoing down a steep hill. D can alsokeep the transmission from cyclingbetween third, fourth, and fifth gearsin stop-and-go driving.

For faster acceleration when in D orD, you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down one,two, or three gears, depending onyour speed.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Set the parking brake.1.

2.

3

3

3

Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock ReleaseDrive (D )


3

338

０６／０８／０２　１０：４５：４４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３４３　

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by a dealer.

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover next to theshift lever. Use a small flat-tippedscrewdriver or a metal fingernailfile to remove the cover. Carefullypry on the edge of the cover.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to neutral.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the driver’s side. Pressthe brake pedal, and restart theengine.

Insert a key into the shift lockrelease slot.

3. 4.

5.

6.


Driving

339

COVER SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

RELEASEBUTTON

０６／０８／０２　１０：４５：５１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３４４　

Each torque indicator is displayedas a bar graph divided into 5segments. The number ofsegments represents the amountof torque distributed to eachwheel.

The SH-AWD torque distributionmonitor on the multi-informationdisplay shows you the amount oftorque being sent to the wheels.Each wheel: right front (RF), leftfront (LF), right rear (RR), and leftrear (LR), has its own torqueindicator.

The super handling-all wheel drive(SH-AWD) system is a full time all-wheel-drive system thatautomatically controls and transfersvarying amounts of engine torque toall wheels independently, accordingto the driving conditions.

While the SH-AWD system helps toenhance the vehicle’s drivingstability in all situations, it is stillyour responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When there is only a slight change intorque distribution while driving,such as cruising on level roads at thesame speed, the torque distributionmonitor may stop displaying theamount of torque. This is not asystem problem. The monitor willshow the amount if the systemsenses any change in torquedistribution.

SH-AWD Torque DistributionMonitor

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) System

340

TORQUE INDICATOR

TORQUE INDICATOR

０６／０８／０２　１０：４５：５８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３４５　

Your vehicle still has normal front-wheel drive with vehicle stabilityassist (VSA), but does not havethe advantages of SH-AWD. Haveyour vehicle checked by a dealeras soon as possible.

If the SH-AWD indicator on theinstrument panel stays on, and the‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’message also appears on the multi-information display, there is problemwith the SH-AWD system.

If the SH-AWD indicator blinks whiledriving, it indicates the differentialtemperature is too high. You will alsosee an ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF TEMP.HIGH’’ message on the multi-information display. If this happens,pull to the side of the road when it issafe, shift to Park, and let the engineidle until the indicator goes out. Ifthe indicator does not go out, takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have it

checked.

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) System

Driving

341

０６／０８／０２　１０：４６：０４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３４６　

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb, and set the parking brake.

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Lock the doors and the tailgate.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

Parking

Parking Tips

342

０６／０８／０２　１０：４６：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３４７　

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator in the instrumentpanel to come on. If this happens,you will see which tire is losingpressure on the multi-informationdisplay along with a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message.

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

It is possible that the pressuresshown on the multi-informationdisplay and the pressures youmanually measure are slightlydifferent.If the difference is significant or youcannot make the low tire pressureindicator and message on the multi-information display go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire.

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Driving

343

０６／０８／０２　１０：４６：２０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３４８　

The TPMS can misinterpret the tirepressure because of differences inthe air temperatures. For example, ifyou check and fill your tires in awarm area, then drive in extremelycold weather, the tire pressure willbe lower than measured and couldbe underinflated and cause theTPMS indicators to come on. Or, ifyou check and adjust your tirepressure in cooler conditions, anddrive into extremely hot conditions,the tires may become overinflated.However, the TPMS indicators willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when thevehicle is cold, and set to therecommended inflation pressure asspecified on the vehicle placard andin the owner’s manual (see page

).

To select the tire pressure monitor,press the INFO button several timeswith the ignition switch in the ON(II) position.

You will see the above display on themulti-information display when alltire pressures are normal.

409

410

Tire Pressure Monitor


344

０６／０８／０２　１７：２０：４７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３４９　

CONTINUED

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator in the instrumentpanel to come on. If this happens,you will see which tire is losingpressure on the multi-informationdisplay along with a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message.

To see the inflation pressures of allfour tires, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes asshown above.

Each tire pressure is shown in PSI(U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadianmodels).


Driving

345

U.S. model Canadian modelThis shows that front left tire islosing pressure.

０６／０８／０２　１５：０２：０７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３５０　

If any of the tires has low pressure,the tire pressure monitor also showsabove message to warn you aboutthe low tire pressure when you selectthe display by pressing the INFObutton several times. Following thisdisplay, press the SEL/RESETbutton to see each tire pressure.When you continue driving afterinstalling the spare tire, you will alsosee this message on the multi-information display.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,the tire pressure monitor shows a‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR’’ andthe tire pressure readings are notdisplayed. If this happens, first youwill see a system warning message‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ on themulti-information display.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,you will see the above message onthe multi-information display.

If you see this message, the systemis off and is not monitoring the tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.


TPMS System Failure

346

０６／０８／０２　１０：４６：４１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３５１　




If the low tire pressure indicatorcomes on, or the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message, the VSA systemautomatically turns on even whenthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF button (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF button again.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSsystem message may also bedisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay after driving several miles(kilometers).

If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure and tire monitor indicatorswill come on. Replace the indicatedflat tire with the compact spare tire(see page ).

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

After you replace the flat tire, thelow tire pressure indicator stays on.This is normal; the system is notmonitoring the spare tire pressure.Manually check the spare tirepressure to be sure it is correct.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

419

352


Changing a Tire with TPMS

Driving

347

０６／０８／０２　１０：４６：４９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３５２　

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. EmergencyBrake Assist System increases thestopping force when you depress thebrake pedal hard in an emergencysituation. The anti-lock brake system(ABS) helps you retain steeringcontrol when braking very hard.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalapplies the brakes slightly. Thisbuilds up heat, and reduces brakeeffectiveness and brake pad life. Inaddition, fuel economy can bereduced. It also keeps your brakelights on all the time, confusingdrivers behind you.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Braking System

Braking System Design

Brake Wear Indicators

348

０６／０８／０２　１０：４６：５７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３５３　

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andmay hear some noise. This is normal:it is the ABS rapidly pumping thebrakes. On dry pavement, you willneed to press on the brake pedalvery hard before the ABS activates.However, you may feel the ABSactivate immediately if you are tryingto stop on snow or ice.

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

432

81

CONTINUED

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS Indicator

Driving

349

０６／０８／０２　１０：４７：０５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３５４　

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

It only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

432

Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

350

０６／０８／０２　１０：４７：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３５５　

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the modulator.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink. Theremay also be some noise from themodulator.

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

If the VSA system indicator comeson while driving, pull to the side ofthe road when it is safe, and turn offthe engine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

If the low tire pressure indicatorcomes on (see page ), or themulti-information display shows a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message(see page ), the VSA systemautomatically turns on even if youturn it off with the VSA OFF switch.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

82

343

VSA Activation Indicator

VSA System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Driving

351

０６／０８／０２　１０：４７：２２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３５６　

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

This switch is under the driver’s sidevent. To turn the VSA system on andoff, press and hold it until you hear abeep.

With the VSA off, the trailer stabilityassist function is also turned off (seepage ).

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

413

367

VSA and Tire Sizes

VSA Off Switch

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

352

０６／０８／０２　１０：４７：３１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３５７　

CONTINUED

The active damper system is alwayson, constantly adjusting your vehicle’sdampers to the best settings forcurrent road conditions along withvehicle speed and handling inputs.

The system uses electricallycontrolled dampers to enhancehandling precision, vehiclecomposure, tire to road adhesion andrough road ride comfort isolation.The system reacts to inputs fromvarious electronic sensors to giveexactly the right amount ofsuspension damping to provideoptimal ride comfort and handling.

The system provides two selectablemodes.

Sport mode: The system prioritizeshandling response, vehicle bodycontrol and tire-to-road adhesion toallow for higher performancehandling.

Comfort mode: The systemprioritizes road isolation to allow fora more comfortable ride.

Either mode can be used in any typeof operating conditions.

To switch between comfort andsport mode, press and release theactive damper system button locatedon the center console to choose thedesired mode.

U.S. Sport Packages and Canadian Elitemodels

Active Damper System

Driving

353

０６／０８／０２　１０：４７：３９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３５８　

If there is a problem with the activedamper system, the active dampersystem shuts down and the activedamper system indicator on theinstrument panel comes on.

You will also see the ‘‘CHECK ADSSYSTEM’’ message appears on themulti-information display.

When comfort mode is selected, thegreen indicator in the button comesON, and the message ‘‘COMFORT’’will appear on the multi-informationdisplay for five seconds.

When sport mode is selected, thegreen indicator in the button goes off,and the message ‘‘SPORT’’ willappear on the multi-informationdisplay for five seconds.

Active Damper System

Active Damper SystemIndicator

354

０６／０８／０２　１０：４７：４６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３５９　

If you see this warning indicator andmessage, have your vehicle checkedat your dealer as soon as possible.

In this case, your vehicle still has thenormal damper function, but it willnot have the active damper function.

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can also use it totow a trailer if you carefully observethe load limits, use the properequipment, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

Your vehicle is equipped with atrailer stability assist to help stabilizethe vehicle/trailer combination byreducing the vehicle speed. Formore information, see page .

Be sure to read thesection on page

if you plan to tow off pavedsurfaces.369

367

Active Damper System, Towing a Trailer

Towing a Trailer

Off-HighwayDriving Guidelines

Driving

355

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

０６／０８／０２　１０：４７：５３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３６０　

－

－

－

The weight that the tongue of a fullyloaded trailer puts on the hitchshould be 5 to 10 percent of the totaltrailer weight for boat trailers, and 8to 15 percent of total trailer weightfor all other trailers. (See page

for limits for your towingsituation). Too much tongue loadreduces front-tire traction andsteering control. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstable

and cause it to sway.

The maximumallowable weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all accessories, all cargo,and the tongue load must not exceed2,888 lbs (1,310 kg) on the front axle,and 3,175 lbs (1,440 kg) on the rearaxle.

The maximumallowable weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all accessories, all cargoand the tongue load is 5,952 lbs(2,700 kg).

The maximum allowable weight ofthe trailer and everything in or on itdepends on the number of occupantsin your vehicle and the type of trailerbeing towed (see page ).

Towing a trailer that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine and driven.

The maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle and trailer is 10,053 lbs(4,560 kg) with the proper hitch. TheGCWR must be reduced 2 percentfor every 1,000 feet (305 meters) ofelevation.

358

358

Towing a Trailer

Tongue LoadTotal Trailer Weight

Gross Axle Weight Ratings(GAWR)

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR)

Load Limit

Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR)

356

０６／０８／０２　１０：４８：０１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３６１　

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Measure and record the distancefrom the ground to the bottom ofthe trailer hitch.

Connect the fully loaded trailer tothe hitch.

Measure again from the ground tothe same spot on the bottom of thehitch.

Subtract the second measurementfrom the first measurement, thenrefer to the following table.

Add the weight of your trailer (asquoted by the manufacturer) witheverything in or on the trailer. Thencheck the tables on page tomake sure you do not exceed thelimit for your conditions.

To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,or if you cannot get to a public scale,we recommend that you estimateyour total trailer weight and tongueload as described next.

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale. For publicscales in your area, check your localphone book, or contact your trailerdealer or rental agency forassistance.

Estimatedtongue load is:

150 lbs (68 kg)250 lbs (114 kg)350 lbs (159 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)

Estimatedtongue load is:

150 lbs (68 kg)250 lbs (114 kg)350 lbs (159 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)

If the difference is more than 1 ½inch, you have too much load on thetongue. Redistribute the load orremove cargo as needed.

If thedifference is:

13/32’’11/16’’31/32’’1 1/4’’

If thedifference is:

1/2’’27/32’’1 5/32’’1 1/2’’

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

358

U.S. Sport Packages and Canadian Elitemodels

MDX and Technology Packages models

Towing a Trailer

To Estimate the Tongue Load

To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight

Estimating Loads

Driving

357

０６／０８／０２　１５：０２：２０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３６２　

＊

－－

＊

＊＊

Number ofOccupants

234567 Towing is Not Recommended

Max. Tongue LoadMax. Trailer Weight

Towing a Trailer

358

Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:

The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg),and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cargo area. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reduces the maximum trailerweight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page ).

Recommended tongue load should be 5 15% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8 15% of the total trailer weight for all othertrailers.

356

500 lbs (227 kg)470 lbs (213 kg)370 lbs (168 kg)275 lbs (125 kg)150 lbs (68 kg)

5,000 lbs (2,268 kg)4,750 lbs (2,155 kg)4,500 lbs (2,041 kg)4,250 lbs (1,928 kg)4,000 lbs (1,814 kg)

０６／０８／０２　１０：４８：２０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３６３　

To accurately check your loads atthe public scale, the vehicle andtrailer should be fully loaded, and alloccupants should stay in the vehiclewhile the attendant watches thescale.

Check the rear gross axle weight.Limit: 3,175 lbs (1,440 kg)

If you cannot weigh the rear axledirectly, you can calculate the reargross axle weight by subtractingthe weight in step 1 from theweight in step 2.

Remember, maximum grosscombined weight should bedecreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet(305 meters) of elevation.

Check the front gross axle weight.Limit: 2,888 lbs (1,310 kg)

Check the gross vehicle weight.Limit: 5,952 lbs (2,700 kg)

Check the gross combined weight.Limit: 10,053 lbs (4,560 kg)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Limit: 3,064 lbs (1,390 kg)

CONTINUED

Checking Loads

Towing a Trailer

Driving

359

０６／０８／０２　１０：４８：３０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３６４　

Towing generally requires a varietyof supplemental equipment. Toensure the best quality, werecommend that you purchase Acuraequipment whenever possible.

Your dealer offers a trailer packagethat includes a hitch, a ball mount,and a wiring harness.

Discuss any additional needs withyour trailer sales or rental agency,and make sure all equipment isproperly installed, maintained, andalso meets state, federal, province,and local regulations.

Check the weight of the unhitchedtrailer. Limit: See page .

Calculate the tongue load.Subtract the weight in step 6 fromthe weight in step 7.Limit: See page .Recommended: see page .Range: 5-10% for boat trailers

8-15% for other trailers

Check the weight of the hitchedtrailer. Write this number down.

7.

8.

6.358

358356

Towing a Trailer

Towing Equipment andAccessories

360

０６／０８／０２　１０：４８：３８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３６５　

CONTINUED

A 4-pin gray connector is available asan option at your dealer. Thisconnector has all of the circuitsrequired to install most electrictrailer brake controllers. A jumperharness to adapt your electric trailerbrake controller to the vehicle isincluded with the optional GenuineAcura trailer hitch kit. To obtain aconnector and a trailer hitch kit, seeyour dealer.

Have a qualified mechanic installyour trailer brake controllerfollowing the trailer brake controllermanufacturer’s instructions. Failureto properly install the trailer brakecontroller may increase the distanceit takes for you to stop your vehiclewhen towing a trailer.

Acura requires that any trailer with atotal trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455kg) or more have its own brakes.

There are two common types oftrailer brakes: surge and electric.Surge brakes are common for boattrailers, since the brakes will get wet.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer manufacturer formore information on installingelectric brakes.

We strongly recommend that youhave your dealer install a class 3hitch. Using non-Acura equipmentmay result in serious damage to yourvehicle.

Read the trailer manufacturer’sinstructions, and select theappropriate draw bar for the heightof the trailer you will be towing.

A weight distributing hitch is notrecommended for use with yourvehicle, as an improperly adjustedweight distributing hitch may reducehandling, stability, and brakingperformance.

Towing a Trailer

Trailer BrakesHitch

Weight Distributing Hitch

Driving

361

０６／０８／０２　１０：４８：４９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３６６　

When towing a trailer, werecommend that you carry a full-sizespare wheel and tire for your vehicleand trailer. See page for propertire size, page for how to store afull size wheel and tire, and page

for information on changing aflat tire.

Remember to unhitch the trailerbefore changing a flat. Ask yourtrailer sales or rental agency whereand how to store the trailer’s sparetire.

Many states and provinces requirespecial exterior mirrors when towinga trailer. Even if they don’t, youshould install special mirrors if youcannot clearly see behind you, or ifthe trailer creates a blind spot.

This device is recommended if yourtrailer tends to sway. Your trailermaker can tell you what kind of swaycontrol you need and how to install it.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

Use this illustration to identify eachterminal in the trailer brakecontroller connector.

413424

419

Towing a Trailer

Spare Tires

Trailer Mirrors

Sway Control

Safety Chains

362

GROUND(BLACK)

BRAKE(20A)(BLUE)

ELECTRIC BRAKE(YELLOW)

STOP(LIGHT GREEN)

０６／０８／０２　１０：４８：５７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３６７　

－

＋

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province,and local regulations. Check trailerlight requirements for the areaswhere you plan to tow, and use onlyequipment designed for your vehicle.

If you use a non-Acura trailerlighting harness and converter, youcan get the mating connector andpins that mate with the connector inyour vehicle from your dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary withtrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

Your vehicle is equipped with aconnector to install an optional trailerlighting connector that mates withyour vehicle. You can get thisoptional connector from your dealer.

Refer to the above illustration forwiring information.

We recommend that you have yourdealer install an Acura wiringharness and converter. This harnesshas been designed for your vehicle.

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Lights

Driving

363

BACK-UPLIGHT ( )

TAILLIGHTS

ELECTRIC BRAKE

ACCESSORY OPTION

TRAILER HAZARDLIGHT

RIGHT TURNSIGNAL

BRAKEDIAGNOSTIC

TRAILER BACK-UP LIGHT

B CHARGE

LEFT TURNSIGNAL

ILLUMINATIONLIGHTS

０６／０８／０２　１０：４９：０６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３６８　

Your vehicle tires and spare are ingood condition and properlyinflated.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The trailer tires and spare are ingood condition and inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Avoid towing a trailer during yourvehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)(see page ).316

Towing a Trailer

Pre-Tow Checklist Driving Safely With a Trailer

Break-In Period

364

０６／０８／０２　１０：４９：１６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３６９　

－－

－－

－－

CONTINUED

If the automatic transmission fluidtemperature increases and exceedsthe specified limit, the A/Ttemperature indicator comes on (seepage ). You will also see a ‘‘A/TTEMP HIGH’’ message on the multi-information display.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses.

Allow more time and distance forbraking. Do not brake or turnsuddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When driving uphill and downhill,use the Sequential SportShift modeto provide the proper engine powerand engine braking on each gear.Select fourth, third, second, or firstgear; depending on the vehiclespeeds and road condition. Do notuse fifth gear. The recommendedspeed range for each gear position isshown in the table.

Gear position

1

2

3

4

Speed range

0 19 mph(0 30 km/h)

19 31 mph(30 50 km/h)

31 41 mph(50 65 km/h)

over 41 mph(over 65 km/h)

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.Use D position when towing a traileron level roads. D is the proper shiftlever position to use when towing atrailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘

’’ on the next page foradditional gear information.)

When towing a fixed-sided trailer (e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph(88 km/h). At higher speeds, thetrailer may sway or affect vehiclehandling.

683

Towing a Trailer

Making Turns and Braking

Towing Speeds and Gears

Drivingon Hills

Driving

365

０６／０８／０２　１０：４９：２５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３７０　

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the transmission shifts frequentlywhile going up a hill, shift to D3.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to D . Donot ‘‘ride’’ the brakes.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steering wheel,then turn the wheel to the left to getthe trailer to move to the left. Turnthe wheel to the right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including putting thetransmission in Park and firmlysetting the parking brake. Also, placewheel chocks at each of the trailer’stires.

If the vehicles tires slip whenretrieving a boat from the water,keep D position and do not use thesequential sport shift mode. Thisprevents the transmission damage.

Your vehicle is not designed to betowed behind a motor home. If yourvehicle needs to be towed in anemergency, see page .

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause the trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

433

3

bottom

Driving on Hills Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

Retrieving a Boat

Remember, ittakes longer to slow down andstop when towing a trailer.

Towing Your Vehicle

Towing a Trailer

366

０６／０８／０２　１０：４９：３５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３７１　

Under these conditions, trailerstability assist begins to stabilize thevehicle/trailer combination byreducing the vehicle speed. Thecontrol unit sends signals toselectively apply the brakes andregulate the engine output. Thebrake lights of your vehicle will beturned on automatically by thesystem even if you do not keep thepressure on the brake pedal.

Your vehicle is equipped with trailerstability assist function. Thisfunction works on the same sensorsas the vehicle stability assist (VSA)system. This function helps tostabilize the vehicle/trailercombination when the trailerseverely sways or oscillates. Formore information of the VSA system,see page .

When the brakes are applied, thetrailer’s brake lights come on alongwith the vehicle brake lights.

When the trailer stability assistactivates, you will see the VSAactivation indicator blink. There mayalso be some noise from the VSAhydraulic system.

Trailer stability assist cannot preventa loss of control. Always reduce thevehicle speed and steer firmly. Donot brake suddenly or make quicksteering motion. It could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over andthe system becomes ineffective.

Trailer stability assist cannot preventswaying that can occur in crosswindsand in normal and emergencydriving maneuvers. It helps only tostabilize the vehicle/trailercombination in these conditions,after the oscillation becomes severe.

If the function detects the vehicle/trailer instability, it checks if theswaying is caused by the trailer, andif the trailer swaying or oscillation isincreasing.

The vehicle/trailer combination ismore affected by crosswinds,buffeting, and improper tongue load.These conditions can make thetrailer unstable, and cause it to sway. Always obey the recommended

speed limits for towing a trailer, seepage .

Trailer stability assist will also beineffective while driving at highspeed or towing a trailer with a highcenter or gravity.

351

365

Trailer Stability Assist

Driving

367

０６／０８／０２　１０：４９：４４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３７２　

If you turn off the VSA, the trailerstability assist function also shuts off.Press and hold the VSA off switchuntil you hear a beep (see page ).The VSA activation indicator comeson as a reminder. Press and hold theswitch again to turn the system on.

The function turns on every time youstart the engine along with the VSA,even if you turned it off the last timeyou drove the vehicle.

The control unit monitors the VSAcircuitry and the braking system. Ifthere is a problem with the brakelighting system, the trailer stabilityassist function shuts down and the‘‘CHECK TRAILER STABILITYASSIST’’ message appears on themulti-information display.

If you see this message, have yourvehicle checked at your dealer assoon as possible.

In this case, your vehicle still has theVSA traction and stabilityenhancement, but it will not have thetrailer stability assist function.

If there is a problem with the VSAsystem, the system and TrailerStability Assist shuts off. The VSAsystem and VSA activation indicatorsalso come on (see page ).

The ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator may also come onalong with the VSA system indicator.

If you see these warning indicators,have your vehicle checked at yourdealer as soon as possible.

351

352

Trailer Stability Assist

Trailer Stability Assist Failure

368

０６／０８／０２　１０：４９：５２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３７３　

To avoid loss of control or rollover,be sure to follow all precautions andrecommendations.

Be sure to store cargo properlyand do not exceed your cargo loadlimits (see page and ).

Whenever you drive, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear seat belts.

Keep your speed low, and nevergo faster than the conditions allow.

It’s up to you to continually assessthe situation and drive within thelimits.

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance andsuper handling-all wheel drive (SH-AWD) system allow you tooccasionally travel on unpaved roads,to campgrounds, picnic sites, andsimilar locations. It is not designedfor trailblazing, mountain climbing,or other challenging off-roadactivities.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your vehicle will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. Be sure to pay extraattention to the precautions and tipsin this section, and get acquaintedwith your vehicle before leaving thepavement.

325 327

Important Safety PrecautionsGeneral Information

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Driving

369

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off-pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

Follow all instructions andguidelines in this owner’smanual.Keep your speed low, anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５０：０１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３７４　

Before you leave the pavement, besure to do all scheduled maintenanceand service, and inspect your vehiclefor any problems. Pay specialattention to the condition of the tires,and check the tire pressures.

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe.Recheck the condition of the tiresand the tire pressures.

The route presents limits (too steepor bumpy roads). You have limits(driving skill and comfort). And yourvehicle has limits (traction, stability,and power).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take the properprecautions.

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway, and you may digyourself a hole. Starting with theshift lever in D position will help youhave a smoother start on snow or ice.

Keep in mind that you will usuallyneed more time and distance tobrake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’the brakes; let the anti-lock brakingsystem pump them for you.

Debris in the road can damage yoursuspension or other components.Because your vehicle has a highcenter of gravity, driving over a largeobstacle, or allowing a wheel to dropinto a deep hole can cause yourvehicle to tip or roll over.

If you can’t clearly see all conditionsor obstacles on a slope, walk theslope before you drive on it. If youhave any doubt whether or not youcan safely drive on the slope, don’tdo it. Find another route.If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue,

. Your vehicle could rollover. Slowly back down the hill,following the same route you took upthe hill.

Before driving through water, stop,get out if necessary, and make surethat:

The water is not deep enough tocover your wheel hubs, axles, orexhaust pipe. You could stall andnot be able to restart your engine.The water can also damageimportant vehicle components.

do not try toturn around

Check Out Your Vehicle

Remember

Accelerating and Braking

Avoiding Obstacles

Driving on Slopes

Crossing a Stream


370

０６／０８／０２　１０：５０：１４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３７５　

The banks are sloped so you candrive out.The water is not flowing too fast.Deep rushing water can sweep youdownstream. Even very shallowrushing water can wash theground from under your tires andcause you to lose traction andpossibly roll over.The banks and surface under thewater provide good traction. Thewater may hide hazards such asrocks, holes, or mud.

If the water is deeper than the wheelhubs, some additional service maybe required. This service is notcovered by your warranties.

If you decide it is safe to drivethrough water, choose a suitablespeed, and proceed without shifting,changing speeds, stopping, orshutting off the engine.

If you get stuck, carefully try to go inthe direction (forward or reverse)that you think will get you unstuck.Do not spin the tires at high speeds.It will not help you get out and maycause damage to the transmission orSH-AWD system.

After driving through water, testyour brakes. If they got wet, gently‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowlyuntil they operate normally.

If you are still unable to free yourself,your vehicle is equipped with frontand rear tow hooks designed for thispurpose.

Use a nylon strap to attach the MDXto the recovery vehicle and carefullytake out the slack in the strap. Oncethe strap is tight, the recoveryvehicle should apply force.Remember that the recovery vehicleneeds good traction to avoid

becoming stuck, too.

You should never use a jack to try toget unstuck. Your vehicle couldeasily slip off the jack and hurt youor someone else.

You may be able to safely tow alightweight trailer (such as amotorcycle or small tent trailer) off-road if you follow these guidelines.

Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45kg).

Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,and avoid driving in hilly terrain.

Allow extra room for starting,stopping, and turning.

Slow down if you encounter bumpsor other obstacles.

If You Get Stuck

Towing a Trailer Off-Road


Driving

371

０６／０８／０２　１０：５０：２５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３７６　

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance messages in the multi-information display, a maintenancerecord, and instructions for simplemaintenance tasks you may want totake care of yourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 374....................Maintenance Minder . 375....................Maintenance Record . 383

..............................Fluid Locations . 385.......Engine Compartment Cover . 386

........................Adding Engine Oil . 387Changing the Engine Oil and

...........................................Filter . 388..............................Engine Coolant . 390

....................Windshield Washers . 392....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 393

....................................Brake Fluid . 395....................Power Steering Fluid . 396

....................................Timing Belt . 396.............................................Lights . 397

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 403................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 403

.....................................Floor Mats . 404.................................Wiper Blades . 405

...........................................Wheels . 408...............................................Tires . 409

...................Checking the Battery . 415.............................Vehicle Storage . 416

463

Maintenance

Maintenance

373

０６／０８／０２　１０：５０：３３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３７８　

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Let the

engine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Maintenance Safety


Injury from moving parts.

Burns from hot parts.

Carbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

374

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５０：４３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３７９　

－－－－－－－－－－－－

One of the most convenient andimportant features of the multi-information display on your vehicleis the maintenance minder.

Based on engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life.

The system also displays the codefor other scheduled maintenanceitems needing service.

The remaining engine oil life isdisplayed according to the tableshown below.

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)

100% 91%90% 81%80% 71%70% 61%60% 51%50% 41%40% 31%30% 21%20% 16%15% 11%10% 6%5% 1%

0%

DisplayedEngine Oil Life

(%)100%90%80%70%60%50%40%30%20%15%10%5%0%

To see the remaining engine oil lifedisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay as a percentage, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. Make sure the displayshows blank, SH-AWD and tirepressure, and then press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheelrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeappears (see page ).73

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life

Maintenance

375

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

０６／０８／０２　１０：５０：５１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３８０　

－

Press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel repeatedly to selectthe engine oil life. The message‘‘SERVICE’’, along with ‘‘5%’’, and themaintenance item code are displayedon the lower part of the multi-information display when thecalculated engine oil life is 1 5percent (see page ).

When the remaining oil life is 1 to 5percent, the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUENOW’’ message with the samemaintenance items ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ was displayed with. Whenyou see this message have theindicated maintenance performed assoon as possible.

When the remaining engine oil life is15 to 6 percent, the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ message along with themaintenance schedule codeindicating the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change.Refer to page for a complete listof the maintenance main items andsub items.

382375

Maintenance Minder

376

MAINTENANCESUB ITEMS

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

０６／０８／０２　１０：５０：５７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３８１　

▼ ▲▼ ▲

－

If the indicated maintenance serviceis not done and the remaining engineoil life reaches 0 %, the multi-information display will show themessage ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’and the maintenance item code(s).This message is displayed when thetotal mileage is less than 10 miles(for U.S. models)/10 km (forCanadian models) after the engineoil life became 0 %.

These messages will come on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe oil life minder as previouslydescribed.

The message will be canceled if theor button on the steering wheel

is pressed. Press the or buttonto see the message again.

Press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel repeatedly to selectthe engine oil life. The message‘‘SERVICE’’, along with ‘‘0 %’’, andthe maintenance item code aredisplayed on the lower part of themulti-information display when thecalculated engine oil life is 0 1 %.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

377

０６／０８／０２　１０：５１：０４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３８２　

▼ ▲▼ ▲

If the indicated required service isnot done and the remaining engineoil life becomes 0 %, the multi-information display will show a‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,the total mileage after the remainingoil life became 0 %, and themaintenance item code(s).

This message is displayed when youdrive over 10 miles (for U.S. models)or 10 km (for Canadian models)after seeing the 0 % message.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as previously described.

The message will be canceled if theor button on the steering wheel

is pressed. Press the or buttonto see the message again.

When you press the SEL/RESETbutton to select the engine oil life,the message ‘‘SERVICE’’, along withthe maintenance item code and thetotal negative mileage after the oillife became 0 %, will be displayed onthe lower part of the multi-information display.

Maintenance Minder

378

MAINTENANCE CODECANADA

U.S.

TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE

TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE

U.S.

CANADA

０６／０８／０２　１０：５１：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３８３　

▲ ▼

All the maintenance items displayedin the multi-information display arein code.

For an explanation of themaintenance codes, see page .

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display thenext time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

If the engine oil life is notdisplayed, press the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheelrepeatedly the multi-informationdisplay shows blank, SH-AWD andtire pressure.

Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then pressthe SEL/RESET button to resetthe engine oil life display. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want tocancel the oil life reset mode,select ‘‘CANCEL.’’

Press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheel for

more than 10 seconds. Theremaining engine oil life resetmode will be shown on the multi-information display.

1.

2.

3.

4.

382

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance

379





０６／０８／０２　１０：５１：２３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３８４　

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out themaintenance record. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Acura dealer knowsyour vehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.

We recommend the use of Acuraparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

380

０６／０８／０２　１０：５１：２９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３８５　

－

－

－

－

－

－

＃

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Acurarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed in accordancewith the intervals indicated by theMulti-Information Display.

410

320

320

393

395

397

Owner’s Maintenance ChecksMaintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

381

０６／０８／０２　１０：５１：３７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３８６　

＃

＃

－－

＃

Maintenance Minder

382

Maintenance Main Items

Replace engine oil

Replace engine oil and oil filter

Inspect front and rear brakes

Check praking brake adjustment

Inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots

Suspension components

Driveshaft boots

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)

All fluid levels and condition of fluids

Exhaust system

Fuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub Items

Rotate tires

Replace air cleaner element

Replace dust and pollen filter

Inspect drive belt

Replace transmission and transfer fluid

Replace spark plugs

Replace timing belt and inspect water pump

Inspect valve clearance

Replace engine coolant

Replace rear differential fluid

Symbol Symbol

A

B

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

1

If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the firstcolumn on page .

Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-informationdisplay, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

461

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

If you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry and fromdiesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles(24,000 km).

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C), or towing a trailer, replace every60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds or trailer towing results in higher level ofmechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requiresdifferential fluid changes more frequently thanrecommended by the Maintenance Minder. If youregularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles(12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

:

1 :

NOTE :

Main

tenance

Sehedule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

０６／０８／０２　１０：５１：４６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３８７　

CONTINUED

Maintenance Record

Maintenance

383

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6


A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on yourvehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your-Acura maintenance journal.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５１：５３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３８８　

Maintenance Record

384

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date


A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6


A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

０６／０８／０２　１０：５１：５９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３８９　

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

385

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)POWER STEERING FLUID

(Red cap)

０６／０８／０２　１０：５２：０３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３９０　

The component parts in the enginecompartment are protected by thecover. You may need to remove thecover when you perform somesimple maintenance work.

Cover is secured by holding clips.

To remove the front bulkhead cover,remove the holding clips with a flat-tipped screwdriver.

Engine Compartment Cover

386

FRONT BULKHEAD COVER

HOLDING CLIP

０６／０８／０２　１０：５２：０８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３９１　

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda motor oil in your vehicle.Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance

387

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

０６／０８／０２　１０：５２：１６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３９２　

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil, itdisplays the API Certification Sealand it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals given in the maintenanceschedule.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the multi-information display. The oil and filtercollect contaminants that candamage your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

1.

2.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Engine Oil andFilter

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

388

WASHER DRAIN BOLT

０６／０８／０２　１０：５２：２５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３９３　

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Check the oil filter to make sureits gasket did not stick to theengine block. A stuck gasket couldcause an oil leak.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

9.

8.

7.

6.

4.

5.

3.

10.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Maintenance

389

OIL FILTER

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５２：３３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３９４　

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda Long-LifeAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 %antifreeze and 50 % water. Never addstraight antifreeze or plain water.

If Honda Long-life antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may useanother major-brand non-silicatecoolant as a temporary replacement.Make sure it is a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda Long-life antifreeze/coolantas soon as possible.

Engine Coolant

Adding Engine Coolant

390

MAX

MIN

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５２：４０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３９５　

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

Remove the radiator cap cover.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

3.

4.

1.

2.

5.

CONTINUED

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

391

RADIATOR CAP COVER RADIATOR CAP

０６／０８／０２　１０：５２：４９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３９６　

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

If the washer fluid is low, a‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

6.

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

Windshield Washers

392

RESERVE TANK MIN

MAX Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５２：５７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３９７　

CONTINUED

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is shown on a maintenancemessage in the multi-informationdisplay.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator fan comes on, thenshut off the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 secondsbefore going to step 2, but don’twait longer than 90 seconds.

1.

2. 3.

4.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

393

DIPSTICK

LOWER MARK

UPPER MARK

DIPSTICK

０６／０８／０２　１０：５３：０４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３９８　

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). If it’snot available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed and refilledwith Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it isconvenient.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Make sure the rubber cap on thedipstick fits in the dipstick guideand that you push the dipstick inall the way.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

5.

6.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

394

０６／０８／０２　１０：５３：１０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０３９９　

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Replace the brake fluid when thisservice is indicated on a maintenancemessage in the multi-informationdisplay.

Check the fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir monthly.

Brake Fluid

Maintenance

395

MAXMIN

０６／０８／０２　１０：５３：１６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４００　

－－

Replace the belt at 60,000 miles(100,000 km) if you regularly driveyour vehicle in one or more of theseconditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

The timing belt should be replacedat the intervals shown in themaintenance minder schedule.

If you frequently tow a trailer.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

If you are not sure how to addfluid, contact your dealer.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspills immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Timing BeltPower Steering Fluid

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

396

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５３：２６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４０１　

CONTINUED

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb by turning itabout one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Remove the front bulkhead cover(see page ).

Open the hood.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustment should be done by yourdealer or other qualified mechanic.

The low beam headlight bulbs are atype of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in thecircuit even with the light switch offand the key removed. Because ofthis, you should not attempt toexamine or change a low beamheadlight bulb yourself. If a lowbeam headlight bulb fails, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itreplaced.

1.

2.

3.

4.

386

MDX and Technology Packages modelsHeadlight Aiming Replacing a High Beam Headlight

Bulb

Low Beam Headlight BulbReplacement

Lights

Maintenance

397

BULB

CONNECTORHalogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５３：３６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４０２　

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Open the hood.Remove the front bulkhead cover(see page ).Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

1.2.

3.

4.

5.

5.

6.

7.

6.

7.

386

Replacing Front Turn Signal/Parking and Side Marker LightBulbs

Lights

398

BULB BULB

SOCKET

FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT PARKING LIGHT

SOCKET

０６／０８／０２　１０：５３：４７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４０３　

CONTINUED

Remove the bolt and use the flat-tipped screwdriver to remove theholding clips located under thefront bumper.

Push down the inner fender.

Your vehicle uses halogen lightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case, and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

1.

2.

Lights

Replacing Front Fog/DaytimeRunning Light Bulbs

Maintenance

399

SIDE MARKER LIGHT BOLT

HOLDINGCLIPS

BULB

SOCKETHalogen bulbs get very hot when lit.Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on theglass can cause the bulb to overheatand shatter.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５３：５５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４０４　

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb from the foglight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the two bolts, and removethe rear light assembly from therear pillar.

Open the tailgate. Use ascrewdriver protected with a clothto pry open the two covers.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: turn signal/hazardlights or side marker light.

1. 2.

3.

3.

4.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Rear Pillar)

400

CONNECTOR

INNER FENDER

COVER BOLT

BOLT

０６／０８／０２　１０：５４：０３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４０５　

CONTINUED

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.



Put the socket back into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Install the rear light assembly inthe rear pillar. Tighten the twobolts. Snap the bolt covers intoposition.

Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the light assemblycover. Remove the cover bycarefully prying in the notch on itsmiddle edge with a flat-tipscrewdriver.

1.4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Replacing a Back-up Light Bulb

Maintenance

401

COVERBULB SOCKET

０６／０８／０２　１０：５４：１３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４０６　

Each outside mirror has side turnsignal lights. The lights should bereplaced by your dealer.

The license plate has two lightsabove it. The bulbs should bereplaced by your dealer.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.



Place the cover back into the lightassembly. Push it up until it locksin place.

Put the socket back into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

4.

5.

6.

2.

3.

7.

Lights

Side Turn Signal Light

Rear License Plate Bulb

402

BULB

SOCKET

０６／０８／０２　１０：５４：２２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４０７　

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the climate controlsystem.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message in the multi-information display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the flow fromthe climate control system becomesless than usual.

Cleaning the Seat BeltsDust and Pollen Filter

Dust and Pollen Filter, Cleaning the Seat Belts

Maintenance

403

LOOP

０６／０８／０３　１７：０７：２０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４０８　

A non-Acura floor mat may not fityour vehicle properly. This couldprevent the proper operation of thepassenger’s seat weight sensors. Werecommend using genuine Acurafloor mats. Do not put additionalfloor mats on top of the anchoredmat.

The floor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over floor mat anchors.This keeps the floor mats fromsliding forward or backward andpossibly interfering with the pedalsor making the front passenger’sweight sensors ineffective.

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

Floor Mats

404

RearFront

０６／０８／０２　１０：５４：３４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４０９　

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, and areasthat are getting hard or if they leavestreaks and unwiped areas whenused.

To replace the front wiper blades:

Raise each wiper arm off thewindshield, lifting the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Press and hold the lock tab.Slide the blade assembly towardthe lock tab until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.

When replacing a wiper blade, makesure not to drop the wiper blade orwiper arm down on the windshield.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

405

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and the wiper arms.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５４：４４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４１０　

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm against thewindow.Windshield: Lower the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

6.

7.

4.

5.

3.

Wiper Blades

406

BLADE BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

０６／０８／０２　１０：５４：５１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４１１　

To replace the rear wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off the rearwindow.

Slide the blade out of the wiperarm.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

3.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

407

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

WIPER ARM

０６／０８／０２　１０：５４：５８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４１２　

Slide the new blade into the wiperarm. Make sure it is engaged inthe slot along its full length.

Lower the wiper arm.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

4.

5.

Wheels

Wiper Blades, Wheels

408

０６／０８／０２　１０：５５：０４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４１３　

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) will warn you when a tirepressure is low. See page forinformation on the TPMS.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires everyday. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

343

CONTINUED

Inflation Guidelines

Tires

Maintenance

409

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５５：１３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４１４　

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Front/Rear:

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the vehiclehas been parked for at least threehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressure.

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreading. This is normal; do notrelease air to match the coldpressure.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured. Youshould look closely for punctures if atire starts losing pressure.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal and high-speed drivingconditions.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .448

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures

410

P255/55R18 104H32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０６／０８／０２　１０：５５：２３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４１５　

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadleft on the tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Tire MaintenanceTire Inspection

Tires

Maintenance

411

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Acura wheel weights f or balancing.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５５：３２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４１６　

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe multi-information display. Movethe tires to the positions shown inthe diagram each time they arerotated. If you purchase directionaltires, rotate only front-to-back.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system toactivate.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work on that tire.

Replacement wheels are available atyour Acura dealer.

Tires

Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

412

Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Front

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

０６／０８／０２　１０：５５：４１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４１７　

＋Wheel:

Tires:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading, and page

for tire size and labelinginformation.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

450

448

Tires

Wheel and Tire Specifications Winter Driving

Maintenance

413

18 x 8 J

P255/55R18 104H

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５５：４９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４１８　

＃

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Acura stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

SCC Super Z-6 SZ 435

Tire ChainsSnow Tires

Tires

414

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５５：５５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４１９　

－

－－

－

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the digit code (seepage ).

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window:

Green Good conditionWhite Liquid level low, replace

batteryBlack Charging necessary

231

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

Maintenance

415

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５６：０２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４２０　

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Vehicle Storage

416

０６／０８／０２　１０：５６：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４２１　

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 418....................Changing a Flat Tire . 419

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 425................................Jump Starting . 426

..............If the Engine Overheats . 428.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 430..........Charging System Indicator . 430

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 431...............Brake System Indicator . 432

Opening the Fuel Fill Door....................................Manually . 433

......................Emergency Towing . 433..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 434

..............................................Fuses . 436..............................Fuse Locations . 440

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

417

０６／０８／０２　１０：５６：１６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４２２　

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Do not mount snow chains on acompact spare.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

The low tire pressure indicatorstays on when you are driving withthe compact spare tire. The TPMSindicator may also come on afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving.

Compact Spare Tire

418

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０６／０８／０２　１０：５６：２５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４２３　

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Open the tailgate.

Push the rear edge of the handleto raise the handle loop and pull upthe loop to raise the cargo areafloor.

2.

1.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

419

JACK

TOOLS

SPARE TIRE

CARGO AREAFLOOR

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５６：３３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４２４　

The spare tire is storedunderneath the rear cargo area.Remove the plastic cover on thecargo area lining to access theshaft for the spare tire hoist.

The tools and jack are under thecargo area behind a cover on thedriver’s side. Remove the cover byturning the knobscounterclockwise, then pulling outthe cover.

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

5. 6. 7.


420

COVERKNOB

PLASTIC COVER

０６／０８／０２　１０：５６：３９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４２５　

Remove the bracket from thespare tire.

Keep turning the wheel nutwrench to create slack in the cable.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Put the wheel nut wrench on thehoist shaft. Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.

11.

10.

8.

9.

CONTINUED


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

421

BRACKET

WHEEL NUT WRENCH WHEEL NUT WRENCH

The wheel nut wrench supplied withyour vehicle is specially adapted to f itthe hoist shaf t. Do not use any othertool.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５６：４７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４２６　

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

12. 13.

14.

15.


422

EXTENSION

BRAKE HUBWHEEL NUT WRENCHJACKING POINT

０６／０８／０２　１０：５６：５４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４２７　

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap from theflat tire.

Place the flat tire face up underthe hoist.

Insert the hoist bracket into thecenter hole of the flat tire.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

20.

21.

18.

19.

17.

16.

CONTINUED


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

423

94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)

０６／０８／０２　１０：５７：０２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４２８　

Slowly turn the wheel nut wrenchclockwise to take up the slack ofthe hoist cable. Make sure thebracket is seated in the centerhole of the flat tire.

Turn the wheel nut wrenchclockwise until the flat tire restsagainst the underbody of thevehicle and you hear the hoistclick.

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Store the tools, and installthe cover.

Refer to(see page ).22.

23.

25.

24.

347


Changing a Tire withTPMS

424

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Always raise the spare tire hoist, evenif you are not stowing a tire. If thehoist is lef t down, it will be damagedduring driving and need to be replaced.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５７：０８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４２９　

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly (see page ).

Check these things:

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

426

433

415

426

69

CONTINUED

If Your Engine Won’t Start

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting The Starter Operates Normally

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

425

０６／０８／０２　１０：５７：１９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４３０　

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the warning indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it. Put the transmission in neutral or

Park, and set the parking brake.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, audio system, lights, etc.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

1.

2.

436

433

331Starting the

Engine

EmergencyTowing

Jump Starting

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

426

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５７：２９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４３１　

－

＋

＋

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromthe engine hanger on your vehicle,then from the booster battery.Disconnect the positive cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery.

Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the engine hanger asshown. Do not connect this jumpercable to any other part of theengine.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourvehicle’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

5.

7.

4.

6.

3.

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

427

BOOSTER BATTERY

０６／０８／０２　１０：５７：３７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４３２　

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason.

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning lights.

1.

2.

3.

If the Engine Overheats

428

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５７：４５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４３３　

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.10.

11.

9.

433

433

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

429

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５７：５３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４３４　

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKCHARGING SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message onthe multi-information display whenthis indicator comes on.

1.

2.

3.

4.

320

387

433

81

Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator

Emergency Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

430

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５８：０４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４３５　

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for a stateemissions test until the readinesscodes are set. Refer to

for moreinformation (see page ).

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have the vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until itclicks at least once. Tightening thecap will not turn the indicator offimmediately; it can take several daysof normal driving.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It can take severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

81456

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

StateEmissions Testing

Readiness Code

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

431

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５８：１２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４３６　

The brake system indicatornormally comes on whenyou turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position, andas a reminder to check theparking brake. It will stayon if you do not fullyrelease the parking brake.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible.

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE

SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take thevehicle to your dealer and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKEFLUID’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

395

81

81

Brake System Indicator

Brake System Indicator

432

Canada

U.S.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５８：２１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４３７　

If the fuel fill door release buttondoes not work, use the release leverinside the rear fuse box lid in thecargo area.

To open the fuel fill door, pull therelease lever rearward.

Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

Opening the Fuel Fill DoorManually

The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

Emergency Towing

Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually, Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

433

LID

RELEASE LEVER

Towing with only two tires on theground will damage parts of theall-wheel-drive system. Your vehicleshould be transported on a f lat-bedtruck or trailer.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５８：２８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４３８　

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing serviceto pull it out (see the previous page).

The cover is attached to the bumperwith a tether.

Remove the cover, put cloth on theedge of the cover and carefully prywith a small flat-tippedscrewdriver or a metal fingernailfile.

For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can use thedetachable towing hook that mountson the anchors in the front and rearbumpers.

1.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

434

Front RearCOVER COVER

０６／０８／０２　１０：５８：３５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４３９　

Remove the towing hook andwheel nut wrench placed behind acover under the cargo area.

Screw the towing hook into thehole, and tighten it with the wheelnut wrench.

2.

3.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

435

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

Front TOWING HOOK

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

TOWING HOOKRear

To avoid damage to your vehicle, usethe towing hook f or straight, f latground towing only. Do not tow at anangle. The tow hook should not be usedto tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Donot use it as a tie down.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５８：４１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４４０　

The vehicle’s fuses are located infour fuse boxes.

The interior fuse box is underneaththe dashboard on the driver’s side.

To remove the fuse box lid, put yourfinger in the notch on the lid, pull ittoward you, and take it out of itshinges.

The rear fuse box is located at theleft side of cargo area.

To open it, push the tabs as shown.

The primary under-hood fuse box islocated on the driver’s side. Thesecondary fuse box is next to thebattery.

Fuses

436

PASSENGER’S SIDE INTERIOR

UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)

UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)INTERIOR LID LID

TAB

TAB

０６／０８／０２　１０：５８：５１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４４１　

Check each of the large fuses inthe primary under-hood fuse boxby looking through the top at thewire inside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

, , and , or the diagramon the fuse box lid, which fuse orfuses control that device. Checkthose fuses first, but check all thefuses before deciding that a blownfuse is the cause. Replace any blownfuses, and check if the device works.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

3.1.

2.

440 441 442

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

437

BLOWNBLOWN

FUSE

０６／０８／０２　１０：５８：５８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４４２　

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned out, replace itwith one of the spare fuses of thesame rating or lower.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse boxes and rearfuse box, and all the fuses in theinterior fuse box by pulling outeach one with the fuse pullerprovided in the primary under-hood fuse box.

5.4.

Fuses

438

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

０６／０８／０２　１０：５９：０４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４４３　

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the digit code (seepage ).

6.

231

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

439

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

０６／０８／０２　１０：５９：０９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４４４　

－－

－－

－－－－－－

－

－－

－

－

－

－－－

－

－

－－

＊

＊

No.No. Amps. Circuits Protected Amps. Circuits Protected

3 53 6

3 73 8

4

56789

101112131415

1

2 12 22 32 42 52 6

2 7

2 83 1

3 2

3 3

3 4

120 A

30 A40 A40 A40 A

40 A

60 A

40 A

60 A

50 A

Main fuseNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedRear Blower MotorABS VSATrailer MainPower Seats, Driver’sPosition Memory System,SubwooferFront Heated Seat, TPMS,Moonroof, Driver’s LumberSupportNot UsedFog Lights, Front BlowerMotorHeadlights, DaytimeRunning LightsCooling Fan, Condenser Fan,MG Clutch, HeadlightWasherIgnition Switch Main

50 A60 A

30 A

40 A

30 A30 A7.5 A15 A15 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

Power WindowSH-AWD, Power TailgateOpen/Closer, Rear ACCSocket, Cargo Area Light,Rear DefrosterECU (PCM)Not UsedAudio, Door Lock, InteriorLightsNot UsedNot UsedActive Damper Control UnitAudio AmplifierRear Entertainment SystemHazardHorn, StopABS VSATrailer (Brake)Rear Heated SeatA/C Inverter

: Canadian model

Fuse Locations

440

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

０６／０８／０２　１２：４３：５６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４４５　

－－－－

－

＊

＊

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps.

No. Circuits ProtectedAmps.

Circuits Protected

12

34

10 A10 A

10 A10 A

Left Daytime Running LightRight Daytime RunningLightLeft Headlight HighRight Headlight High

56789

1011121314151617181922

7.5 A30 A7.5 A15 A15 A15 A15 A40 A20 A30 A30 A30 A7.5 A15 A15 A7.5 A

123456789

1011

Not UsedNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedRear ACC SocketPower TailgateNot UsedCargo Area LightSH-AWDRear DefrosterPower Tailgate

10 A20 A

10 A30 A30 A40 A

Small Lights (Exterior)Headlight Low MainCooling Fan TimerIGPIG CoilDBWAFHTFront Blower MotorFog lightsHeadlight WasherCondenser FanCooling FanMG ClutchLeft Headlight LowRight Headlight LowSmall Lights (Interior)

: Canadian model

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

441

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX REAR FUSE BOX

０６／０８／０２　１０：５９：２４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４４６　

－

－


No. Amps.


No. Amps.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected

12

345

7.5 A10 A

10 A20 A10 A

TPMSDriver’s Lumber SupportMotorMoonroofFront Heated SeatsAudio

6789

1011121314151617181920

21

7.5 A10 A20 A15 A15 A30 A10 A20 A20 A20 A20 A20 A10 A20 A7.5 A

7.5 A

12

7.5 A7.5 A

Starter DIAGSTS

222324252627282930

31

3233

10 A

20 A20 A30 A30 A20 A10 A10 A

15 A

10 A

Interior LightInterior Light, MoonroofDoor LockACC SocketIG CoilWindshield WiperSubwooferPassenger’s Power ReclineDriver’s Power SlideTelescope Steering WheelDriver’s Power ReclinePassenger’s Power SlideAlternatorFuel PumpSH-AWD, Active DamperControl UnitGauges

SRSNot UsedLeft Rear Power WindowRight Rear Power WindowPassenger’s Power WindowDriver’s Power WindowTilt Steering WheelABS VSAA/CHeadlight Auto Leveling,Rear Wiper, Windshield/Rear WasherACCNot Used

Fuse Locations

442

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Auxiliary

Auxiliary

０６／０８／０２　１２：４４：０５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４４７　

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 444................................Specifications . 446

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 448

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 448.................................Treadwear . 448

......................................Traction . 448.............................Temperature . 449

.................................Tire Labeling . 450Tire Pressure Monitoring System

......................................(TPMS) . 451

.......................Emissions Controls . 453.....................The Clean Air Act . 453

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 453

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 453

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 453

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 454....................PGM-FI System . 454

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 454

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 454

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 454

....................Replacement Parts . 454..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 455

..............State Emissions Testing . 456

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

443

０６／０８／０２　１０：５９：３７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４４８　

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

444

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

０６／０８／０２　１０：５９：４１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４４９　

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

445

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

０６／０８／０２　１０：５９：４６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４５０　

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

446

Dimensions Capacities

Air Conditioning

Weights

1.93 US gal (7.3 )2.43 US gal (9.2 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )3.0 US qt (2.8 )8.6 US qt (8.1 )

190.7 in (4,844 mm)77.0 in (1,955 mm)68.2 in (1,733 mm)

21.00 US gal (79.5 )LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

108.3 in (2,750 mm)67.7 in (1,720 mm)67.5 in (1,715 mm)

See the tire information label atta-ched to the driver’s doorjamb.

10,053 lbs (4,560 kg)

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidReardifferentialfluidTransferassemblyfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

2.6 US qt (2.5 )2.9 US qt (2.7 )

0.4 US qt (0.4 )0.4 US qt (0.4 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )6.7 US qt (6.3 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:0.16 US gal (0.6 )Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

HFC-134a (R-134a)21.2 22.9 oz (600 650 g)

ND-OIL8

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross combined weightrating (GCWR)

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

U.S. vehiclesCanadianvehicles

ChangeTotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

1 :

1

1

2

０６／０８／０２　１１：００：０２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４５１　

－－

－－－－－－－－－－－－－－－－－－

－－

＊

＊

Specifications

TechnicalInform

ation

447

Battery

Engine

Fuses

Tires

Alignment

Lights

60 W12 V12 V 35 W

12 V 5 W12 V 5 W

8 W5 W2 W3.4 W

12 V12 V12 V12 V

The low beam headlights are high voltage discharged type.Replacement of a low beam headlight bulb should be performed byyour dealer.

Capacity 12 V

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

11.0 : 1223.5 cu-in (3,664 cm )

3.54 x 3.78 in (90.0 x 96.0 mm)

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHCVTEC V6 gasoline engine

Interior

Rear

Under-hood

12 V12 V

21 W3 CP

SKJ20DR-M11

12 V 3 CP12 V 18 W12 V 3 CP

21 W12 V12 V 3.4 W

55 W12 V12 V 3 CP

60 W12 V

12 V65 AH/5 HR76 AH/20 HR

Size

Pressure60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

T165/80D17 104MP255/55R18 104H

Toe-in

Camber

Caster 4°12’0°30’0°30’

0.08 in (2.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

Headlights

Daytime running lightFront side marker lightsFront turn signal lightsParking lightsFog lightFront foot lightsRear turn signal lightsRear side marker lightBackup lightsLicense plate lightsIndividual map lights

Cargo area lightTailgate lightVanity mirror lightDoor light

IZFR6K-11

See page 442 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox lid.See page 441 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox lid.See page 440 and 441 or the fusebox cover.

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

FrontRearFrontRearFront

FrontRear

HighLow

:

(H11)

(HB3)(D2S)(HB3)

DENSO:NGK:

IN

０６／０８／０２　１１：００：３０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４５２　

－The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

448

０６／０８／０２　１１：００：３９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４５３　

－ Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature A, B, C

TechnicalInform

ation

449

０６／０８／０２　１１：００：４３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４５４　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following exampleTIN. TIN is located on the sidewallof the tire.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. The following is anexample of tire size with anexplanation of what each componentmeans.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Tire type code.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Date of manufacture.

Max Press The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

Max Load The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

P

55

R

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

255

18

104

H

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

450

P255/55R18 104H

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

０６／０８／０２　１１：００：５８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４５５　

－

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

TechnicalInform

ation

451

０６／０８／０２　１１：０１：０５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４５６　

－

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

452

０６／０８／０２　１１：０１：１０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４５７　

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positive

crankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

382

Emissions Controls

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery T

echnicalInformation

453

０６／０８／０２　１１：０１：１８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４５８　

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to worktogether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newAcura replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

2

2

Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

454

０６／０８／０２　１１：０１：２８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４５９　

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Acura partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

TechnicalInform

ation

455

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTICCONVERTER

０６／０８／０２　１１：０１：３６　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４６０　

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm, andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (about 3 minutes).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

456

０６／０８／０２　１１：０１：４３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４６１　

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mphfor at least 20 minutes. Drive onthe highway in D. Do not use thecruise control. When traffic allows,drive for 90 seconds withoutmoving the accelerator pedal.(Vehicle speed may vary slightly;this is okay.) If you cannot do thisfor a continuous 90 secondsbecause of traffic conditions, drivefor at least 30 seconds, then repeatit two more times (for a total of 90seconds).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

State Emissions Testing

TechnicalInform

ation

457

０６／０８／０２　１１：０１：４７　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４６２　

Customer Service................................Information . 460

....................Warranty Coverages . 461Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 462.....................Authorized Manuals . 463

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

459

０６／０８／０２　１１：０１：５３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４６４　

U.S. Owners:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact the AcuraCustomer Service Office.

Acura dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

444

Customer Service Information

460

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Acura Client ServicesMail Stop 500-2N-7E1919 Torrance Blvd.Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

０６／０８／０２　１１：０２：０１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４６５　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

this warranty gives upto 100 % credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Acura accessories are covered underthis warranty. Time and mileagelimits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

covers all Acurareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2007 Acura warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2007 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

461

０６／０８／０２　１１：０２：１１　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４６６　

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA), in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer,or Acura Automobile Division,American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from .

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

462

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

０６／０８／０２　１１：０２：１５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４６７　

＊

＊

＊

－

＊２００７

ＡＣＵ

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Acura dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

463

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Form Description

2007 Acura MDX Service Manual

2007 Acura MDX

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2007 Acura MDX

Body Repair Manual

2007 Acura MDX Owner’s Manual

2007 Acura MDX

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2007 Acura MDX Maintenance Journal

2007 Acura MDX Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Price

Each

$75.00

$50.00

$44.00

$40.00

$30.00

$12.00

$15.00

FREE

Publication

Form Number

61STX00

61STX00EL

61STX30

31STX601

31STX800

31STXM00

31STXQ00

ACU-R

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

www. helminc. com

０６／１１／０８　１０：００：４４　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４６８　

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

464

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

０６／０８／０２　１１：０２：３３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４６９　

CONTINUED

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 65, 430............................Jump Starting . 426

..............................Maintenance . 415............................Specifications . 447

..............................Before Driving . 315....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 20

.........................Beverage Holders . 161..................................Booster Seats . 55

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 349

.............Break-in, New Linings . 316...........................................Fluid . 395

....................Bulb Replacement . 400.......................................Parking . 151

.................System Indicator . 65, 432........................Wear Indicators . 348

.............................Braking System . 348.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 316

Brightness Control,...............................Instruments . 123

......................Brights, Headlights . 118Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 401..............................Brake Lights . 400

................Front Parking Lights . 398........Front Side Marker Lights . 398

.................................Headlights . 397

.................................Rear Bulbs . 400............................Specifications . 447

....................Turn Signal Lights . 398..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 397

...Accessories and Modifications . 322ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.....................................Position) . 129............Accessory Power Sockets . 164

...........................AC Power Outlet . 165................Active Damper System . 353

.....................................Acura Link . 303....................Additives, Engine Oil . 388

...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 24..............Air Conditioning System . 168

.....................Rear A/C Control . 173.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 175.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 410

......................................Antifreeze . 390Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

....................Indicator Light . 66, 349...................................Operation . 349

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 231Anti-theft Steering Column

............................................Lock . 129................Audio System . 178, 179, 198

Auto Control Mode, Starting........................................Engine . 331

..........Automatic Climate Control . 168

.......................Automatic Lighting . 119...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 22

.............Automatic Speed Control . 266..............Automatic Transmission . 333

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 446...............Checking Fluid Level . 393

.......................................Shifting . 333Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 333................Shift Lever Positions . 334

....................Shift Lock Release . 338

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I

０６／０８／０２　１１：０２：３８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４７０　

＊

................................Cancel Button . 268............................Capacities Chart . 446

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 58..........................Cargo Area Light . 158

...................................Cargo Hook . 327....................Cargo, How to Carry . 324

.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii........................Certification Label . 444

.................................Chains, Tires . 414....................Changing a Flat Tire . 419

Changing Oil........................................How to . 388......................................When to . 375

...Charging System Indicator . 65, 430............Checklist, Before Driving . 330

................Childproof Door Locks . 131.....................................Child Safety . 37

..............................Booster Seats . 55.............................Child Seats . 42, 45

.....Important Safety Reminders . 40..........................................Infants . 42

..........................Larger Children . 54.........................................LATCH . 47

......................Risks with Airbags . 38

.............................Small Children . 43..........................................Tether . 51

.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 38.......................................Child Seats . 45

........LATCH Anchorage Points . 47....Tether Anchorage Points . 52, 53

.......................Cleaning Seat Belts . 403...............Climate Control System . 168

..............................................Clock . 232.....................Code, Audio System . 231

........................CO in the Exhaust . 453......................Compact Spare Tire . 418

.................Console Compartment . 162...............Consumer Information . 460

.............Controls, Instruments and . 61Coolant

........................................Adding . 390....................................Checking . 320

.........................Proper Solution . 390...................Temperature Gauge . 72

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 453

................Cruise Control Indicator . 70............Cruise Control Operation . 266

...................................Cup Holders . 161.............Customer Service Office . 460

.........................Customize Settings . 83................Door/Window Setup . 105

...........................Lighting Setup . 100.................................Meter Setup . 89

..............................Position Setup . 97........................Setting to Default . 86

...............................Wiper Setup . 113

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 3, 62

..............Daytime Running Lights . 120.................................Dead Battery . 426

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 462..............Defogger, Rear Window . 122..............Defrosting the Windows . 172

..........................Differential Fluid . 446....................................Dimensions . 446

.............Dimming the Headlights . 118Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 393..................................Engine Oil . 320

..........................Directional Signals . 67........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 348

.......................................Disc Care . 227

Index

D

C

II

０６／０８／０２　１１：０２：４３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４７１　

CONTINUED

...................................Fan, Interior . 171Features, Comfort and

..............................Convenience . 167....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 317

Filters...............................................Oil . 388

...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 122...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 419

.....................................Floor Mats . 404

........................Disc Changer . 188, 216Disc Changer Error

...........................Messages . 197, 226............................Disc Player . 188, 216

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 389Doors

............Locking and Unlocking . 130..................Lockout Prevention . 131

........................................Monitor . 11....................Power Door Locks . 130

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 448...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 329....................................Economy . 316

Driving Position Memory........................................System . 155

......DVD Player Error Messages . 261...................................DVD Player . 236

..............................Economy, Fuel . 316..................................Emergencies . 417

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 426...........Brake System Indicator . 432

................Changing a Flat Tire . 419

.....Charging System Indicator . 430..................Checking the Fuses . 437

...........Driving with a Flat Tire . 418.......Hazard Warning Flashers . 122

............................Jump Starting . 426.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 430...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 431

..................Overheated Engine . 428Opening the Fuel Fill Door

................................Manually . 433.......................................Towing . 433

.........................Emergency Brake . 151....................Emergency Flashers . 122

......................Emergency Towing . 433.......................Emissions Controls . 453

Engine............Check Starting System . 332

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 72.........................If it Won’t Start . 425

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 65, 431.......................................Oil Life . 375

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 65, 430

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 387...............................Overheating . 428

............................Specifications . 447

............................Speed Limiter . 338.......................................Starting . 331

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 453...............................Exhaust Fumes . 58

Exhaust Gas Recirculation........................................System . 454

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 18

Index

E

F

IND

EX

III

０６／０８／０２　１１：０２：４８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４７２　

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 393

..........................................Brake . 395..........................Power Steering . 396

..................Windshield Washer . 392FM Stereo Radio

...................................Reception . 203.....................................Fog Lights . 120

..............Folding the Second Seat . 142.................Folding the Third Seat . 143

........................Four-way Flashers . 122..............................Front Airbags . 9, 27

......................................Front Seat . 140....................................Adjusting . 140

.....................................Airbags . 9, 27

.......................................Heaters . 146.................................................Fuel . 316

......................Fill Door and Cap . 317...........................................Gauge . 72

................Octane Requirement . 316Opening the Fuel Fill Door

................................Manually . 433...............................Oxygenated . 316

........................Reserve Indicator . 71........................Tank, Filling the . 317......................Tighten Fuel Cap . 318

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 437

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 321.........................................Gasoline . 316...........................................Gauge . 72

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 71................Octane Requirement . 316

........................Tank, Refueling . 317................Gas Station Procedures . 317

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 72

...............................................Fuel . 72...............................Speedometer . 72

.................................Tachometer . 72GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 356GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

.......................................Rating) . 356............Gearshift Lever Positions . 334

......................................Glove Box . 162GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 356

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 397..........................HandsFreeLink . 276

..............................HFL Buttons . 277............Hazard Warning Flashers . 122

.....................................Headlights . 118........................................Aiming . 397

..................Automatic Lighting . 118.........Daytime Running Lights . 120

..................High Beam Indicator . 70.........High Beams, Turning on . 118

....................Lights On Indicator . 70..........Low Beams, Turning on . 118

.......................Reminder Chime . 118........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 397

.................................Turning on . 118.....................................Washers . 117...................................Headphones . 262

............................Head Restraints . 141...............................Heated Mirror . 154...............................Heaters, Seats . 146

.....................Heating and Cooling . 168...............High-Low Beam Switch . 118

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 272

TM

Index

G

H

IV

０６／０８／０２　１１：０２：５３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４７３　

CONTINUED

.......................Hood, Opening the . 319................................................Horn . 115

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 444Ignition

............................................Keys . 126.........................................Switch . 129

............Timing Control System . 331......................Immobilizer System . 128

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 63

......Active Damper System . 71, 353...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 66

....................................A/T Temp . 68Brake (Parking and Brake

............................System) . 65, 432.........................Brake Lamp . 65, 432

................Charging System . 65, 430.............................Cruise Control . 70

.................................Cruise Main . 70DRL (Daytime Running

......................................Lights) . 70...................................Fog Lights . 70...................................High Beam . 70

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 69.....................................Lights On . 70......................................Low Fuel . 71

................Low Oil Pressure . 65, 430......................Low Tire Pressure . 68

...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 431..........................Security System . 71...........................Side Airbag Off . 66

.......................................Seat Belt . 64..............................SH-AWD . 69, 340

...............................................SRS . 66...................System Message . 68, 80

...............Tire Pressure Monitor . 68Turn Signal and Hazard

...................................Warning . 67............................VSA Activation . 67

.................................VSA System . 67..................Individual Map Lights . 158

...............................Infant Restraint . 42......................................Infant Seats . 42

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 409.................................Inside Mirror . 152

.............................Inspection, Tire . 411........................Instrument Panel . 4, 63

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 123........................Interface Dial . 198, 303

...............................Interior Lights . 157........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 422.......................................Jack, Tire . 419

................................Jump Starting . 426

................................................Keys . 126...........Keyless Memory Settings . 139

.......................Label, Certification . 444...............Lane Change, Signaling . 118

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 15, 21....................Light Control Switch . 157

Index

J

L

K

I

IND

EX

V

０６／０８／０２　１１：０２：５９　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４７４　

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 397

.......................................Indicator . 63.......................................Interior . 157.......................................Parking . 118.............................Load Limit . 325, 356

....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 129Locks

.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 129............................Fuel Fill Door . 317

..................................Glove Box . 162..................Lockout Prevention . 131

...............................Power Door . 130..............................Tailgate . 131, 132

........................Low Coolant Level . 320.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 71

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 65, 430...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 446

............Luggage, Storing (cargo) . 324

..................................Maintenance . 373Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 381........................................Minder . 375

................................Record . 383, 384..........................................Safety . 374

....................................Schedule . 382.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 431

...........Memory, Driving Position . 155.............................Message Display . 80

..........................Message Indicator . 68...............................Meters, Gauges . 72

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 153.................................Modifications . 323

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 323.......................................Moonroof . 150

.............Multi-Information Display . 73

...................Neutral Gear Position . 334..................New Vehicle Break-in . 316

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 444

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 316.........................................Odometer . 75

...............................Odometer, Trip . 75

....................Off-Highway Driving . 369...................Off-Road Precautions . 369

Oil........................Change, How to . 388......................Change, When to . 375......................Checking Engine . 320

...............................Life, Engine . 375..............Pressure Indicator . 65, 430

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 387

.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 129............................Outside Mirrors . 153

.....................Outside Temperature . 76....................Overheating, Engine . 428

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 381.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 316

............Panel Brightness Control . 123........................Park Gear Position . 334

...........................................Parking . 342...............................Parking Brake . 151

Parking Brake and Brake.................System Indicator . 65, 432

...............................Parking Lights . 118

Index

N

O

P

M

VI

０６／０８／０２　１１：０３：０５　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４７５　

＊

CONTINUED

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 342

....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 34.............................PGM-FI System . 454

..............Power Seat Adjustments . 140...............Power Socket Locations . 160

............................Power Windows . 147.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11

...Additional Safety Precautions . 19.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18

........................Protecting Children . 37.....................General Guidelines . 37

.......................Protecting Infants . 42.......Protecting Larger Children . 54

.........Protecting Small Children . 43Using Child Seats with

.....................................Tethers . 51.............................Using LATCH . 47

...................Radiator Overheating . 428...Radio/Disc Sound System . 179, 199

...........................Readiness Codes . 456...............................Rear A/C Unit . 173

............Rear Audio Control Panel . 237

........Rear Entertainment System . 233..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 400.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 314

..........................Rear View Mirror . 152...............Rear Window Defogger . 172

Rear Window Wiper and.......................................Washer . 117

.............Reclining the Seat Backs . 140.........Reclining the Second Seats . 142

.......................Reminder Indicators . 64................Remote Audio Controls . 229.................Remote Control (RES) . 238

.....................Remote Transmitter . 135Replacement Information

................Engine Oil and Filter . 388..........................................Fuses . 437

................................Light Bulbs . 397....................................Schedule . 375

................................Timing Belt . 396...........................................Tires . 412

.............................Wiper Blades . 405Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 23...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 320

...............................Restraint, Child . 37..................Reverse Gear Position . 334

................................Rotation, Tire . 412

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 20.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 462

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

..................................Door Locks . 11..........................Head Restraints . 14

.................................Seat Belts . 8, 15...............Seats & Seat-Backs . 12, 13

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 59..............................Safety Messages . iii

...............Satellite Radio, XM . 183, 208

Index

IND

EX

S

R

VII

０６／０８／０２　１１：０３：１０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４７６　

＊

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 15...............Additional Information . 20

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 22

.....................................Cleaning . 403......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21

................................Maintenance . 23Reminder Light and

................................Beeper . 20, 64...................System Components . 20

...............Use During Pregnancy . 18...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15

...............................................Seats . 140.......Adjusting the Second Seat . 142

..........Folding the Second Seat . 142.............Folding the Third Seat . 143

........................Head Restraints . 141.......................................Heaters . 146

......................Position Memory . 155....................Third Row Access . 143

............................Security System . 265Sensors

....Driver’s Seat Position Sensor . 29Front Passenger’s Weight

.....................................Sensors . 29......................Impact Sensors . 25, 26

........Sequential SportShift Mode . 335...............................Serial Number . 444

...........................Service Intervals . 375

...........................Service Manual . 463.........Service Station Procedures . 317

........................................SH-AWD . 340.......................................Indicator . 69

..Torque Distribution Monitor . 340Shifting the Automatic

.............................Transmission . 333.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 333

........................Shift Lock Release . 338....................................Side Airbags . 30

................................Off Indicator . 34......................Side Curtain Airbags . 32

Side Marker Lights, Bulb.........................Replacement in . 398

...............................Signaling Turns . 67.....................................Snow Tires . 414

........................Sound System . 179, 199Spare Tire

..............................Inflating . 410, 418............................Specifications . 447

....................Specifications Charts . 446................................Speed Limiter . 338................................Speed Control . 266

...................................Speedometer . 72..........SRS, Additional Information . 26

...Additional Safety Precautions . 35......Airbag System Components . 24

.............................Airbag Service . 35..How the SRS Indicator Works . 33

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 27

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 32.............................SRS Indicator . 33, 66

..START (Ignition Key Position) . 129.......................Starting the Engine . 331

...................Auto Control Mode . 331In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 332................With a Dead Battery . 425..............State Emissions Testing . 453

........Steam Coming from Engine . 428Steering Wheel

................................Adjustment . 124...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 129

......................Buttons . 229, 266, 277......................Position Memory . 155

...Stereo Sound System . 178, 179, 198

Index

VIII

０６／０８／０２　１１：０３：１３　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４７７　

CONTINUED

..................Storage Compartment . 162....................Storing Your Vehicle . 416

........................................Sun Visor . 164Supplemental Restraint System

......................................Servicing . 35.........................SRS Indicator . 33, 66

...................System Components . 24..................................Synthetic Oil . 388

.....................................Tachometer . 72..........................................Tailgate . 131

...............................Opening the . 131..............................Open Monitor . 11

.........................................Power . 132......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 400

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 417Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 448.....Emissions Control Systems . 453

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 455

.......................Temperature Gauge . 72........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 177

....................Temperature, Outside . 76

...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 22..............Tether Anchorage Points . 51

................Theft Protection, Radio . 231..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 455.Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel . 124

....................................Timing Belt . 396

....................................Tire Chains . 414.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 419

.................................Tire Labeling . 450Tire Pressure Monitoring

............System (TPMS) . 343, 451Low Tire Pressure

...........................Indicator . 68, 343.......Tire Pressure Monitor . 77, 343

...............................................Tires . 409..............................Air Pressure . 409

.........................Checking Wear . 411..........................Compact Spare . 418

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 448......................................Inflation . 409

..................................Inspection . 411..............................Maintenance . 411

...................................Replacing . 412......................................Rotating . 412

...........................................Snow . 414............................Specifications . 447

................................Tire Chains . 414...................Tools, Tire Changing . 419

Torque Distribution Monitor.................................(SH-AWD) . 340

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 355

................Emergency Wrecker . 433....Equipment and Accessories . 361

.............................Weight Limit . 356.........................Trailer Loading . 356

..............Trailer Stability Assist . 368.................Trailer Towing Tips . 364..................Trailer Stability Assist . 368

Transmission...............Checking Fluid Level . 393

...........................Fluid Selection . 394..............Identification Number . 444.............Shifting the Automatic . 333

.....................................Treadwear . 411................................Trip Computer . 78

.......................................Trip Meter . 75....................................Turn Signals . 67

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 419

Index

IND

EX

T

IX

０６／０８／０２　１１：０３：１８　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４７８　

＊

＊

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 417

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 448........................Unleaded Gasoline . 316

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 389

................................Vanity Mirror . 164.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 325

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 446....Vehicle Identification Number . 444

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 351

..VSA System Indicator . 67, 81, 351VSA Activation

....................Indicator . 67, 81, 351.........................VSA Off Switch . 352

.............................Vehicle Storage . 416.....................................Ventilation . 175

.................................................VIN . 444..................................Viscosity, Oil . 387

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 59

..................Warranty Coverages . 461Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 392............................Level Indicator . 71

...................................Operation . 116Wheels

.............Adjusting the Steering . 124............Alignment and Balance . 412..........Aluminum Alloy Wheels . 408

.....................................Cleaning . 408..........................Compact Spare . 418

..............................Wrench, Nut . 421Windows

.............................Auto Reverse . 148................Operating the Power . 147

.........................Rear, Defogger . 122Windshield

.....................................Cleaning . 116...................................Defroster . 172

.....................................Washers . 116Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 405

...................................Operation . 116Rear Windshield Wiper and

...................................Washer . 117....................................Worn Tires . 411

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 433

................XM Satellite Radio . 183, 208

: U.S. only

Index

W

X

V

U

X

０６／０８／０２　１１：０３：２２　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４７９　

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Brake Fluid:Rear Differential Fluid:

Transfer Assembly Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

21.00 US gal (79.5 )

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement.

Capacity:SH-AWD differential case

SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosityhypoid gear oil, API serviceclassified GL4 or GL5 only.

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Front/Rear:32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Compact Spare Tire:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

387

394396

395

０６／０８／０２　１１：０３：４０　３１ＳＴＸ６００　０４８１　

2007 acura mdx online reference owner's manual...

Documents